JP2019042254A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of performing an appropriate display control for a second holding display which can be controlled in a special state.SOLUTION: A game machine can execute variable display of first identification information and second identification information in parallel, can control a state to a predetermined state different from an advantageous state (e.g. small winning game state), and can control a state to a normal state (e.g. non-KT state) and a special state (e.g. KT state) in which frequency to be controlled to a predetermined state by selecting a short variation time at a high rate as an execution time of variable display of the second identification information is higher than the normal state. The game machine can display a first holding display corresponding to the first identification information and a second holding display corresponding to the second identification information, and can make it difficult to visually recognize the second holding display, in a specific period including the timing in which the special state is completed.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 64

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of performing a game using gaming media.

As a game machine, when a game medium such as a game ball is shot into a game area by a launch device, and the game medium is paid in a prize area such as a prize hole provided in the game area (also referred to as "start prize") Some prize balls are paid out to the player. Furthermore, a variable display device capable of variably displaying identification information (also referred to as "variation") is provided when a game medium has won in a specific pay area (also referred to as "starting area"), and identification is performed in the variable display device. Depending on the display result of the variable display of information, it is configured to be able to be controlled to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player or a predetermined state (small hit gaming state) different from the advantageous state is there.

The advantageous state means an advantageous state for a player who has been given a predetermined gaming value. Specifically, the advantageous state is, for example, a state in which the state of the special variable winning means has a right to become advantageous to the player who is likely to win the game medium (big hit gaming state), to be advantageous to the player. A predetermined gaming value is provided, such as a condition in which the condition of the premium game medium payout is easily established. The predetermined state is a state advantageous to the player as well as the advantageous state, but is a state in which the degree of profit is relatively lower than the advantageous state (small hit gaming state).

In such a gaming machine, the display result of the variable display device for displaying a symbol as identification information is “
When the display mode (big hit symbol) indicating "big hit" is reached, for example, the special winning opening is opened a predetermined number of times, and the gaming medium shifts to an advantageous state (big hit gaming state) in which winning is easy to be won. When there is a winning on the 10) special winning opening or a predetermined opening time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, the special winning opening is closed. In addition, when the display result of the variable display device indicates a "small hit" display mode (small hit symbol), for example, the special winning opening is opened once and an advantageous state (small hit gaming state) in which the game medium can win. When the predetermined opening time (for example, 0.8 seconds) elapses, the special winning opening is closed.

Further, among the above-described gaming machines, the first identification information is variably displayed when the game medium is won in the first start area, and the second identification information is variable when the game medium is won in the second start area. Display
Some variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information can be performed in parallel (also referred to as "simultaneous change possible"). Further, in such a gaming machine, when the variable display of the first identification information can not be started, information on the variable display of the first identification information is stored as the first hold storage, and the variable display of the second identification information is If it is not possible to start, it is possible to store information on variable display of the second identification information as a second pending storage. And, by providing a special state in which a time shorter than the normal state is set as the time (the fluctuation time) of the variable display of the second identification information in this simultaneously variable gaming machine, the predetermined state (small hit) is set in the special state. There is one configured such that the frequency (for example, the frequency of occurrence of small hits per unit time) controlled to the gaming state is high. For example, in Patent Documents 1 and 2, a predetermined number of times (for example, 50 times)
In the high probability state (special state), by setting the variation time of the second identification information to be shorter than the normal state (low probability state), control can be performed with the frequency of occurrence of small hits higher than in the normal state. It is stated that there is.

JP, 2017-86643, A (paragraph 0128, 0234, 0237, 0512) JP, 2016-202287, A (paragraph 0009, 0308-0311)

By the way, in the patent documents 1 and 2 which can be controlled in the special state as described above, the fluctuation time of the second identification information is set to be relatively long in the normal state. Specifically, in Patent Document 1, it is set to 180 seconds to 300 seconds, and in Patent Document 2, it is set to 10 hours. As described above, in the gaming machine having a long variation time of the second identification information in the normal state as described in Patent Documents 1 and 2, the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage in the normal state (second hold display Also called.)
Making it visible is not appropriate.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of realizing appropriate display control for the second hold display in a gaming machine which can be controlled in a special state.

(Means 1) A gaming machine according to the present invention is a gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information and capable of controlling an advantageous state (for example, a big hit state) advantageous to a player, the first identification information (for example,
Variable display execution means (for example, step S26A, S26B in the microcomputer 560 for game control) which can execute variable display of the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (for example, second special symbol) in parallel Predetermined state control means (for example, the game control microcomputer 560) that can be controlled to a predetermined state (for example, a small hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player and different from the advantageous state A short change time is selected at a high ratio as an execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state (for example, non-KT state) and the normal state (for example, see FIG. 13) State control means (eg, similar to the special state (for example, KT state) that can be controlled to a predetermined state with a high degree of frequency. , Step S2208A in the gaming control microcomputer 560, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S221
4B), a first hold storage unit (for example, a first hold storage buffer) capable of storing information on variable display of the first identification information as the first hold storage, and variable display of the second identification information A second hold storage unit (for example, a second hold storage buffer) capable of storing information as a second hold storage, and a first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (for example, a first hold in the first hold display unit 61 Hold display means (for example, step S 707 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying the second hold display (for example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) corresponding to the second hold storage And the hold display means includes a specific period including the timing when the special state ends (for example, a period in which the chance Oite can be difficult visually recognize the second hold display (e.g., see FIG. 64), characterized in that. According to such a configuration, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display in the gaming machine which can be controlled in the special state.
More specifically, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display.

(Means 2) When the variable display of the second identification information (for example, the second special symbol) is performed in the means 1, a specific display corresponding to the second identification information (for example, the second in the second specification display portion 62a) Specific display means (for example, microcomputer 2 for effect control) which can display specific display
The hold display means can display the second hold display in a period other than the above specific period (for example, a period in which the chance time end 迄 the remaining 5 fluctuation or less) performing steps S9308 and S9310 at 00) The specific display means can display the specific display as it is, and the hold display means can make the second hold display difficult to view in the specific period (
For example, it is possible to make step S7082 impossible when the step S7081 is Y) and to make it difficult for the particular display means to visually identify the particular display (for example, step S9310 is not executed when Y is the step S9309). , May be characterized. According to such a configuration, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized also for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

(Means 3) In the means 2, based on establishment of the start condition, predetermining means for determining whether or not to control in the advantageous state (for example, the microcomputer 560 for playing
65A, a part that executes S65B), and a specific determination means (for example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control) determines whether or not to be in an advantageous state based on the second hold storage before the determination of the predetermination means , S215, S216, and S322),
The suspension display means changes the second suspension display corresponding to the second suspension storage subject to the determination of the specific determination means to the first special mode according to the determination result of the specific determination means It is possible to execute a change effect (for example, a suspension notice), and the specific display means, in accordance with the determination result of the predetermination means, displays the specific 2) A second mode change effect (for example, a specific advance notice) that can be changed to a special mode can be executed, and in a predetermined period including a specific period (for example, a period that the opportunity time end
The specific display means restricts the execution of the second mode change effect (for example, the step). In the case of Y in S9306, Step S9307 may not be executed). According to such a configuration, it is possible to avoid the inconsistency of the effect in the specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to view.

(Means 4) In any one of Measures 1 to 3, the state control means is a special state.
Control may be performed to a first special state (for example, the first KT state) and a second special state (for example, the second KT state) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. . According to such a configuration, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the playability in the special state,
It is possible to improve the interest of the game when controlling to a special state.

(Means 5) In any one of means 1 to 4, corresponding to variable display of identification information, variable of the rendering symbol (for example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display portion 91a or the second background symbol display portion 92a) Display and reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (for example, the first small symbol display portion 91b
And effect control means (for example, S920D, S920E, S92 in the microcomputer 200 for effect control) which can execute variable display of the small symbols in the second small symbol display portion 92b or
0H, S920I, and S920K are provided, and the effect control means, in the normal state (for example, non-KT state), the effect pattern (for example, the first background symbol display portion) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information The variable display of the background symbol in 91a is not executed, and the variable display of the effect symbol (for example, the background symbol in the second background symbol display section 92a) corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (for example, step S920C Step S920E is executed if Y is Y and step S920J is executed if N is step S920G), special state (Y).
For example, in the KT state), variable display of the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is performed, and variable display of the effect pattern corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is not performed (for example, step S920G Step S920I is executed if Y is Y and step S920F is executed if N is step S920 C), the first identification information and the second identification information depending on whether the normal state or the special state is controlled. A reduced symbol corresponding to any variable display of identification information (for example, a small symbol in the first small symbol display portion 91 b or the second small symbol display portion 92 b)
The variable display may be performed (for example, one of steps S920D and S920H may be performed depending on whether it is a non-KT state or a KT state).
According to such a configuration, it is possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and to reduce the degree of recognition of the variable identification display of the second identification information to the player in the normal state.

(Means 6) In any of means 1 to 5, in the normal state (for example, the non-KT state), the hold display means can display the first hold display but can not display the second hold display. (For example, step S 7075 is executed when Y is step S 7073, and step S 7080 or S 708 2 is not executed when N is step S 7077). According to such a configuration, the player's visibility for the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage can be reduced in the normal state, and appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. .

(Means 7) In means 6, the pending display means displays the first pending storage number display corresponding to the number of first pending storages regardless of whether the normal state or the special state is controlled.
Display pending storage number display 71) and do not display the second pending number display corresponding to the number of second pending storage (for example, in the case of Y in step S7071, execute step S7072 and Y in step S7076) Even in the case, the process corresponding to step S 7072 may not be performed), or the like. According to such a configuration, it is possible to reduce the player's visibility for the number of second holding memories while securing the player's recognizability for the number of first holding memories. The appropriate display control can be realized for each number of pending storages of the two pending storages.

(Means 8) In any of means 1 to 7, the game medium (for example, game ball) is provided on a predetermined path (for example, to the right of the game area 7) of the flow-down paths for flowing down After the game medium passes through the specific area (for example, the big hit gaming state) after the specific area (for example, the operation gate 17) and the predetermined condition (for example, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) is established. Step S30 in the case of Y at step S2501 in the microcomputer 560 for controlling the game)
Execute a predetermined promotion notification (for example, a first instruction notification) for promoting the discharge of the game medium to the predetermined route based on that 5 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed and that the predetermined condition is established. The promotion notification means (for example, the second instruction notification) capable of executing the specific promotion notification (for example, the second instruction notification) promoting the firing of the game medium to the specific area after the predetermined period (for example, 10 seconds) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Step S4404 in the effect control microcomputer 200
, S4405, S4604, and S4605) may be further included. According to such a configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

It is the front view which saw the pachinko game machine from the front. It is a front view of the special variable winning prize ball device with which a pachinko game machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the closed state of the special variable winning combination ball device with which a pachinko game machine is provided. It is a perspective view in the open state of the special variable winning combination ball device with which a pachinko game machine is provided. It is a block diagram showing an example of circuit composition of a game control board (main board). It is a block diagram which shows the circuit structural example of a relay board | substrate, an effect control board | substrate, a lamp driver board | substrate, and an audio | voice output board | substrate. It is a flowchart which shows main processing. It is a flowchart which shows timer interruption processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows each random number. It is an explanatory view showing an example of a relation between a big hit judgment random number and a big hit judgment value. It is explanatory drawing which shows a big hit classification determination table. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is an explanatory view showing a variation pattern (variation time) of a special symbol and a decorative symbol. It is an explanatory view for explaining the opening pattern of the variable winning a prize ball device and the special variable winning a prize ball device in KT state. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is an explanatory view showing an example of contents of an effect control command. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st starting opening switch passage process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structural example of a pending | holding storage buffer. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the processing during the 1st special symbol change in the 1st special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st special symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a 1st gate passage waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows the 1st big winning a prize opening opening processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 1st big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd special symbol normal processing. It is a flow chart which shows the 2nd big hit end processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of a program of special symbol display control processing. It is an explanatory view for explaining an external output signal which a game machine outputs. It is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of an external output signal which a game machine outputs. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a normal symbol process processing. It is a flow chart which shows regular symbol normal processing. It is explanatory drawing which shows a normal symbol determination table. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol change processing. It is a flow chart which shows normal symbol stop processing. It is a flowchart which shows a process of opening normally electric combination. It is a flowchart which shows a normally-powered prize-part operation process. It is a flowchart which shows the main processing which the microcomputer for presentation control performs. It is an explanatory view showing an example of composition of a command receiving buffer. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows the example of command analysis processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing at the time of definite command reception. It is a flowchart which shows a background design process processing. It is a flowchart shown about instruction information control processing. It is a flowchart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flowchart which shows demonstration display control processing. It is a flow chart which shows background design variation start processing. It is a flow chart which shows processing during background design variation. It is a flow chart which shows background symbol change stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows background symbol change stop processing. It is a flow chart which shows big hit end production processing. It is a flowchart which shows a small hit middle process. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction alerting | reporting in this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which shows the example of a display of the instruction alerting | reporting in this Embodiment. It is a timing chart when the big hit gaming state ends and is controlled to the first KT state. It is a flow chart which shows pending storage display control processing in a modification. It is a flowchart which shows the background symbol variation start process in a modification. It is a flow chart which shows specific display control processing in a modification. It is explanatory drawing which shows an example of the screen layout in a modification. It is an explanatory view showing an example of display control of the 2nd reservation display etc. in a modification.

Hereinafter, embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of a pachinko gaming machine 1 which is an example of a gaming machine will be described. Fig. 1 shows a pachinko game machine (ball ball game machine) 1
It is the front view which saw from the front. Although a pachinko gaming machine is shown here as an example of a gaming machine, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko gaming machine, and may be, for example, an image-type gaming machine, a coin gaming machine, and a slot machine. It is also good.

The pachinko gaming machine 1 is configured of an outer frame (not shown) formed in a vertically-long rectangular shape and a game frame attached to the inside of the outer frame so as to be openable and closable. In addition, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape provided so as to be openable and closable in the game frame. The play space has a front frame (not shown) which can be freely opened and closed with respect to the outer frame, and a mechanism board to which mechanical parts and the like are attached
It is a structure which includes various components (except game board 6 mentioned below) attached to them and not shown).

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a glass door frame 2 formed in a frame shape.
On the lower surface of the glass door frame 2, there is a hitting ball supply plate (upper plate) 3. At the lower part of the bat supply tray 3, there are provided a surplus ball tray 4 for storing gaming balls which can not be accommodated in the bat supply tray 3, and a bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 for firing a bat. In addition, on the back of the glass door frame 2, the game board 6 is detachably attached. The game board 6 is a structure including a plate-like body that constitutes the game board and various components attached to the plate-like body. Further, on the front of the game board 6, there is formed a game area 7 in which the thrown in game balls (balls) can flow down.

Near the center of the game area 7, an effect display device 9 configured of a liquid crystal display (LCD) is provided. On the display screen of the effect display device 9, there are a plurality of types that can be identified based on the establishment of the first start condition which is the first execution condition (for example, that the hitting ball has won the first start winning opening 13). A display area (hereinafter referred to as a first variable display portion 9a) for variably displaying a decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) for presentation and deriving and displaying a display result, and establishment of a second start condition as a second execution condition A display area for variably displaying a plurality of decorative design symbols (second decorative symbols) for identifying various types based on (for example, hitting a hit in the second starting winning opening 14) and displaying the display result A display area (hereinafter referred to as a background pattern) in which the player can more easily view the display content than the first variable display section 9a and the second variable display section 9b (hereinafter referred to as the second variable display section 9b) And the display unit 9c). It is to be noted that easy to visually recognize the display content means, for example, that the size of the display area is large, or the display content in the variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b is always monochrome. The display color may change. Further, in this embodiment, in the background symbol effect section 9c, display control of identification information (hereinafter also referred to as background symbol) is performed in three display areas of left, middle and right. In addition, a winning is that a game ball has entered an area, such as a winning opening, which is previously determined as a winning area. Further, deriving and displaying the display result means to stop and display the symbol. In this embodiment, one background symbol effect portion 9c is provided for two variable display portions (the first variable display portion 9a and the second variable display portion 9b), and in the background symbol effect portion 9c, The effect corresponding to any of the decorative symbols (first and second decorative symbols) variably displayed in one of the variable display portions is executed, so the condition of the decorative symbol (for example, whether the big hit symbol is derived and displayed Make it difficult to understand In this embodiment, the background pattern is for performing symbol variation display for effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), and corresponds to the identification information for effect, the decorative symbol, and the effect symbol. .

At the upper part of the effect display 9, a first special symbol display (special symbol display device) 8a and a second special symbol display 8b for variably displaying a special symbol as identification information are provided. In this embodiment, each of the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b is realized by a simple and small display (for example, a 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0 to 9, for example. It is done. Hereinafter, the identification information variably displayed in the first special symbol display 8a is the first
It is called a special symbol, and identification information variably displayed on the second special symbol display 8b may be referred to as a second special symbol. In addition, the first special symbol and the second special symbol may be collectively referred to as a special symbol.

In the vicinity of the first special symbol display 8a, the number of activated winning balls that have entered the first starting winning opening 13, ie, the number of the first pending storage number (pending storage is also referred to as starting storage or starting winning storage) is displayed. A first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a consisting of four indicators is provided. The first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning.
Then, every time variable display on the first special symbol display 8a is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one. In the vicinity of the second special symbol display 8b, there is a second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b consisting of four indicators for displaying the number of activated winning balls that have entered the second start winning opening 14, ie, the number of reserved memories. It is provided. The second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b increases the number of lighted indicators by one each time there is a valid start winning. Then, every time variable display on the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted indicators is reduced by one.

The first variable display unit 9a is operated during the variable display time of the special symbol by the first special symbol display 8a.
A variable display of a decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration (for effect) is performed. In addition, the second variable display unit 9b
During the variable display time of the special symbol by the second special symbol display 8b, the variable display of the decorative symbol as a symbol for decoration is performed. The first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b for performing variable display of the decorative symbol are controlled by the effect control microcomputer mounted on the effect control board. Hereinafter, identification information variably displayed in the first variable display portion 9a may be referred to as a first decorative symbol, and identification information variably displayed in the second variable display portion 9b may be referred to as a second decorative symbol. In addition, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol may be collectively referred to as a decorative symbol. In addition, the type of the first decorative pattern and the type of the second decorative pattern are the same (for example, both numbers are 0 to 9).
The type may be different. When the types are different, some may be different. As an example, the type of the first decorative pattern includes the numbers 0 to 5 and characters other than numbers, and the type of the second decorative pattern is the characters other than the numbers 0 to 5 and the first decorative pattern You may make it include something different from the character of.

On the display screen of the effect display device 9, the number of activated winning balls entering the first start winning opening 13, ie, the first reserved storage number, and the number of activated winning balls entering the second starting winning opening 14, ie the second reserved storage number An area to display the total number (total number of pending storages) that is the sum of
It is said. ). As described above, in this embodiment, the sum total of the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages is displayed on the symbol holding storage display portion 18c which is relatively easy for the player to visually recognize. It is difficult to grasp each of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number. In this embodiment, the first special symbol holding memory indicator 18a and the second special symbol holding memory indicator 18b are respectively four indicators such as lamps and LEDs smaller than the symbol holding memory indicator 18c. Although configured, in order to make it difficult to grasp the first number of pending storages and the second number of pending storages, the display of another aspect may be used. As an example, if the first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a and the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b are respectively configured by one indicator, and if the display color is different or the display density is different according to the number of pending storages To make it

In this embodiment, the upper limit of the displayable total number of pending storages, ie, the total number of pending storages, is eight.
It is. The symbol hold storage display unit 18c increases the number of display areas to be lit by one each time there is an effective start winning combination. Then, each time variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of lighted display areas is reduced by one. Or, symbol hold storage display unit 18
Among the eight display areas in c, the number of areas displayed in a color predetermined as an effective start winning is increased by one. Then, each time variable display of the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b is started, the number of areas displayed in a color determined as an effective start winning is reduced by one.

Further, in this embodiment, the upper limit value of the first pending storage number is 4 and the upper limit value of the second pending storage number is 4. Therefore, when the game ball is won in the first starting winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is four, the winning becomes an invalid start winning that does not satisfy the first starting condition. When the gaming ball has won a prize in the first starting winning opening 13 when the first reserved memory number is less than 4, the winning becomes an effective starting winning (first effective starting winning) that establishes the first starting condition. Similarly, the second
In the case where the number of reserved memories is 4, when the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 14, the winning becomes an invalid start winning that does not establish the second starting condition. When the game ball is won in the second starting winning opening 14 when the second reserved memory number is less than four, the winning becomes the valid starting winning (second valid starting winning) that establishes the second starting condition. In this example, the upper limit value of the first pending storage number is 4 and the upper limit value of the second pending storage number is 4 and the upper limit value of the combined pending storage number is 8;
Those values are an example. Further, the upper limit value may be changeable according to the gaming state.

Below the effect display device 9, a winning device having a first start winning hole 13 is provided.
The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 13 is guided to the back of the game board 6 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a. When a game ball is detected by the first starting opening switch 13a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

A gate 32 is provided to the right of the effect display device 9. The game ball having passed through the gate 32 is detected by the gate switch 32a. Further, below the gate 32, an operation gate 17 is provided. The game ball that has passed through the actuation gate 17 is the actuation gate switch 1
Detected by 7a.

Below the operation gate 17, a special variable winning ball device 20 that forms a big winning opening is provided. The special variable winning ball device 20 has an opening and closing plate, and when the specific display result (big hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the specific display result (big hit symbol) on the second special symbol display 8b In the advantageous state (big hit gaming state) that occurs when the display is derived, the opening / closing plate is controlled by the solenoid 21 to be in the open state, whereby the big winning opening serving as the winning area is opened. The game ball that has won the special winning opening is detected by the first count switch 23a. When a game ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, a predetermined number (for example, 15) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Below the special variable winning ball device 20, a special variable winning ball device 22 forming a special winning hole 24 for small hit and a variable winning ball device 15 having a second start winning hole 14 are provided.
As shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is disposed on the left side, and the variable winning prize ball device 15 is disposed adjacent to the right side thereof. Although the details will be described later, the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 extend in the left-right direction in a slightly inclined state, and have a plate-like bottom surface formed as the bottom surface of the flow channel By moving the member back and forth, the special winning opening 24 located at the lower side of the bottom member and the second start winning opening 14 have an open state (also referred to as an open state) where the gaming ball can win and the gaming ball wins Change to an impossible closed state (also referred to as a closed state). In the small hit gaming state which occurs when the predetermined display result (small hit symbol) is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 22 has moved the bottom member forwardly forward From the closed state, the bottom surface member is moved backward toward the rear to perform open control in which the special winning opening 24 serving as the winning area is opened. In addition, when the variable winning ball device 15 hits the normal symbol display 10 and the symbol is derived and displayed, the bottom member is moved backward from the closed state in which the bottom member is moved forward and forward, The opening control is performed to open the second start winning opening 14 which is a winning area.

In this embodiment, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 and the variable winning prize ball device 15 are formed to have the same structure, but as shown in FIG.
Compared with 5, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is slightly larger. Further, as shown in FIG. 1, since the special variable winning ball device 22 and the variable winning ball device 15 are disposed adjacent to each other, the game area 7 is dropped without winning in the special variable winning ball device 20. The game ball first drops onto the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, if the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 is moved backward and the second start winning opening 14 is in the open state, The game ball wins the second starting winning opening 14 and the game ball does not flow toward the special variable winning ball device 22. Meanwhile, the second start winning opening 1
If 4 is not in the open state, the gaming ball moves on the bottom member of the variable winning ball device 15 and is guided to the special variable winning ball device 22. At this time, if the bottom member of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is moved backward and the special winning opening 24 is in the open state, the gaming ball wins the special winning mouth 24. Furthermore, if the special winning opening 24 is not in the open state, the gaming ball moves on the bottom member of the special variable winning winning ball device 22 and falls to the out opening 26 as it is.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 1, the special variable winning ball device 22 is disposed on the left side, and the variable winning ball device 15 is disposed on the right side.
The bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 15 is formed to be gently inclined from the upper right to the lower left, and when the bottom member is not retracted and is in the closed state, special variable from the variable winning ball device 15 Since the game ball is configured to flow toward the winning ball device 22, in this sense, the variable winning ball device 15 is provided upstream, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is downstream. It can be said that

In the special winning opening 24, a switch (a second count switch 25a, see FIG. 5) capable of detecting a game ball having won in the special winning opening 24 is provided. Second count switch 25a
When a game ball is detected by the game, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information. Here, when the gaming ball passes (enters) the special winning opening 24 in the special variable winning winning ball device 22 in an open state, the number of winning balls is smaller compared to when the gaming ball has won in the special winning opening. For example, more winning balls are paid out than when the game ball passes (enters) other winning openings such as the first starting winning opening 13a and the second starting winning opening 13b. Therefore, when the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is controlled to open and the special winning opening 24 is opened, it is advantageous for the player. On the other hand, if the special variable winning ball device 22 is closed and the special winning opening 24 is closed, the game ball can not pass (enter) the special winning opening 24 to obtain a winning ball. It is a disadvantage for the disabled.

Further, in the second start winning opening 14, an S switch 14a capable of detecting a game ball having won in the second start winning opening 14 is provided. When the game ball is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a, a predetermined number (one) of game balls are paid out as a prize ball based on the detection information.

Hereinafter, the first starting winning opening 13 and the second starting winning opening 14 may be collectively referred to as a starting winning opening or a starting opening.

In this embodiment, the gate 32, the actuation gate 17, and the special variable winning ball device 20 (
Large winning opening), variable winning ball device 15 (second start winning opening 14), and special variable winning ball device 2
Since 2 (special winning opening 24) is provided on the right of the game area 7, the player aims at the right of the game area 7 and performs the shooting operation when in the big hit game or in the KT state described later (A so-called right-handed operation) is performed.

In the present embodiment, the time required for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds or more. Specifically, gate 3
It is adjusted by the installation position of 2 and the variable winning a prize ball apparatus 32, and the nail group which forms the flow-down path of a game ball. Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 can be controlled to an open state based on passage of the gaming ball through the gate 32, and the 1st K described later
In T state, the time from when the game ball passes the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be open is 0.5 seconds, and after the game ball passes the gate 32, the variable prize Because it is shorter than 0.6 seconds which is the time required to reach the ball device 15, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when one gaming ball passes the gate 32 in the first KT state In this case, the one game ball can be won by the variable winning ball device 15 as it is.

Below the effect display device 9, an ordinary symbol display 10 for variably displaying an ordinary symbol is provided. In this embodiment, the normal symbol display 10 is realized by a simple and small display (for example, 7-segment LED) capable of variably displaying the numbers 0-9.

When the game ball passes the gate 32 and is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 1
Variable display of 0 display is started. Then, when the stop symbol in the normal symbol display 10 is a predetermined symbol (hit symbol, for example, symbol "7"), the variable winning ball device 15 is in an open state for a predetermined time. That is, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is in a state advantageous to the player from a disadvantageous state (a state where the game ball can be won in the second start winning opening 14) Change to In the vicinity of the normal symbol display 10, a normal symbol hold storage indicator 4 having a display by four LEDs for displaying the number of winning balls that have passed through the gate 32.
1 is provided. Each time the game ball is passed to the gate 32, that is, whenever the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol hold storage indicator 41 is lighted.
Increase by one. And each time the variable display of the normal symbol display 10 is started, the LED which lights up
Reduce one.

On the left and right periphery of the game area 7 of the game board 6, there is provided a decorative lamp 25 which blinks during the game, and at the lower part there is an out port 26 where a non-winning hit ball is taken. Further, on the upper left and right of the game area 7, two speakers 27 are provided for producing sound effects and sounds as a predetermined sound output. A ceiling lamp 28a, a left frame lamp 28b and a right frame lamp 28c provided on the front frame are provided on the outer peripheral upper portion, outer peripheral left portion and outer peripheral right portion of the game area 7. In addition, the prize ball lamp 51 which lights up when there are prize ball remaining numbers near the left frame lamp 28b
Is provided, and the ball out lamp 5 is lit in the vicinity of the right frame lamp 28 c when the supply ball is out.
2 is provided.

In the game machine, a hit ball firing device (not shown) which drives the drive motor in response to the player operating the hitting operation handle 5 and uses the rotational force of the drive motor to launch the game ball into the game area 7 ) Is provided. If the player continues to operate the bat operating handle 5, 0.6
A game ball is hit every second. The game balls fired from the hit ball launcher enter the game area 7 through the ball hitting rails formed in a circular shape so as to surround the game area 7, and then descend the game area 7. If the game ball enters the first start winning opening 13 and is detected by the first start opening switch 13a, it is possible to start variable display of the first special symbol (for example, big hit game end or previous variable display is ended) (The first start condition is satisfied), the variable display (variation) of the first special symbol is started in the first special symbol display portion 8a, and the variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed in the variable display portion 9a. It is started. That is, the first special symbol corresponds to the winning of the first start winning opening 13. If it is not in a state where variable display of the first special symbol can be started, the total number of pending storages (total number) displayed on the symbol pending storage display unit 18c on condition that the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value. Increase by one.

Also, when the gaming ball enters the second start winning opening 14 and is detected by the second starting opening switch 14a,
If it is in a state where the variable display of the second special symbol can be started (for example, the end of the big hit game or the last variable display is ended, and the second start condition is satisfied), the second special symbol display portion 8b While the variable display (variation) of the special symbol is started, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is started in the second variable display portion 9b. That is, the second special symbol corresponds to the winning of the second start winning opening 14. If it is not in a state where variable display of the second special symbol can be started, the total number of pending storages displayed on the symbol pending storage display unit 18c (total number) on condition that the second pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value Increase by one. However, even if the second pending storage number has reached the upper limit,
If the total number of pending storages has not reached the upper limit value, the total number displayed on the symbol pending storage display unit 18c is increased by one.

The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first variable display portion 9a are stopped when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the first special symbol at the time of stop becomes the big hit symbol (specific display result), it shifts to the big hit gaming state. That is,
The special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened until a predetermined time (for example, 29 seconds) elapses, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of gaming balls win a prize winning opening. It is one round in the big hit gaming state until a fixed period elapses after the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened, or until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of hitting balls win the big winning opening. When a predetermined number of gaming balls win the big prize winning opening, or when a predetermined period of time elapses after the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is opened, a continuation right is generated, and the opening of the special variable prize winning ball device 20 is performed again. The generation of the continuation right is permitted a predetermined number of times (for example, 2 rounds, 6 rounds, 16 rounds). Note that
The V winning area may be provided in the special winning opening, and the continuation right may be generated on condition that the hitting ball has won the V winning area while the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened. The number of rounds in the jackpot gaming state differs depending on the type of jackpot. In the present embodiment, the type of big hit is 2
There are two rounds of big hit gaming state, for example, 2R normal big hit or 2R positive change big hit, there are 2 round big hit gaming state, 6R normal big hit or If 6R probability variation big hit occurs, the big hit gaming state of 2 rounds is granted, if 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the 16 round big hit gaming status is granted.

When it is decided to stop the stop symbol at the time of the change stop of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a to be a big hit symbol with special probability change (special display result: definite change symbol, for example, "7" etc.) Is the probability that the next big hit is a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state and low probability /
This is an advantageous state for the player having a probability change state (high probability state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state) than in the first KT state). In addition, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is decided to the probability variation symbol and shifts to the probability variation state, the first in the first special symbol display 8a
Not only the probability that the special symbol will be the big hit symbol is high, but also the probability that the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b will be the big hit symbol will be high. That is, not only the big hit determination based on the first start winning, but also the big hit determination based on the second starting winning will be determined as a big hit with a higher probability than the low probability state.

The variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second variable display portion 9b stop when a predetermined time has elapsed. When the second special symbol at the time of stop becomes a big hit symbol (specific display result), it shifts to the big hit gaming state.

When it is decided that the stop symbol at the time of fluctuation stop of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b is to be a big hit symbol with special fluctuation (special display result: probability variation symbol such as "7" etc.) Is the probability that the next big hit is a low probability state (low probability / non-KT state and low probability /
This is an advantageous state for the player having a probability change state (high probability state in which a big hit is more likely to occur than low probability state) than in the first KT state). In addition, when the stop symbol of the second special symbol is decided to the probability variation symbol and it shifts to the probability variation state, the second in the second special symbol display 8b
Not only the probability that the special symbol will be the big hit symbol is high, but also the probability that the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a will be the big hit symbol will be high. That is, not only the determination of the big hit based on the second start winning, but also the determination of the big hit based on the first start winning will be determined as a big hit with a higher probability than the low probability state.

In addition, when the second special symbol at the time of stop becomes a small hit symbol, it shifts to the small hit gaming state. That is, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is opened until a predetermined time for the game ball to be won in the special winning opening 24 has elapsed. As a result, even in the small hit gaming state, although the number is smaller than the big hit gaming state, the player is able to obtain a payout.

In the positive variation state, as described above, the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8
The probability that the stop symbols of the first special symbol and the second special symbol variably displayed in b become a big hit symbol (specific display result: for example, an odd number of 0 to 9) is higher than the low probability state.

Here, the gaming state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in the gaming state in the present embodiment, there are a normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and a KT state (so-called small hit time) which is likely to be smaller hit than the normal state. Furthermore, there are two types of KT states, the first KT state and the second KT state. In this embodiment, the gaming state is a low probability state and non-K state.
When controlled to T state (low probability / non KT state: normal state), low probability and 1st KT
When controlled to the state (low probability / first KT state), when controlled to the high probability and first KT state (high probability / first KT state), and when it is controlled to the high probability and second KT state (high probability / first 2K
There is a case where it is controlled to T state).

In the first KT state among the KT states, as described later, although the small hit is likely to occur and the special variable winning ball device 22 is likely to be in the open state, the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is extremely long. Even in the event that the game ball does not win on the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side, even if it occurs, there are very few cases (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 changes). Also, the second of the KT states
In the KT state, as described later, the opening time of the upstream variable winning ball device 15 is short, and when a small hit occurs, the gaming ball easily wins the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side.

The definite change state is a gaming state that is more likely to be a big hit than the low probability state. Specifically, since the number of big hit judgment values in the big hit judgment table in the definite change state is 10 times the number of big hit judgment values in the big hit judgment table in the low probability state, the positive change state is generated as a big hit than the low probability state It is easy to play.

In addition, the KT state is a gaming state in which a small hit is more likely to occur than the normal state (low probability / non-KT state). Specifically, in this embodiment, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state by hitting a common figure is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. And since it is constituted so that it will be small hit altogether except when it becomes a big hit at the time of the change of the 2nd special symbol (however, except in the case of forced removal which will be mentioned later), the KT state is smaller hit than the normal state. It is considered to be a game state that is easy to become. As a result, in the KT state, small hits are frequently generated mainly by causing the second special symbol to fluctuate, and the gaming state is advantageous to the player.

In addition, as a structure for making a KT state into the game state which becomes easy to become a small hit rather than a normal state, it does not restrict to this. For example, even in the KT state, the probability that the variable winning ball device 15 will be in the open state per common drawing is the same as the normal state (for example, 10% or 100%), but when the second special symbol changes By configuring the fluctuation time of the selected fluctuation pattern to be shorter in the KT state than in the normal state, the ratio of the number of fluctuations with respect to the fixed time is higher in the KT state than in the normal state. It may be a gaming state that is more likely to be a small hit.

Next, transition of the game state in the present embodiment will be described. First, in this embodiment, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the player aims at the left side of the game area 7 and performs a game ball emission operation (left strike). Therefore, in the normal state, the start winning on the first start winning opening 13 mainly occurs, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the normal state, transition to the low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, or high probability / second KT state is made. For example, when 6R normal big hit occurs, low probability / 1st K
After transitioning to the T state and ending 100 fluctuation displays without the occurrence of a big hit,
Exit the 1st KT state and shift to the normal state. Also, for example, when a 6R probability variation big hit occurs, it shifts to the high probability / first KT state, and thereafter, until the next big hit occurs, the high probability / first one
KT state is maintained. Also, for example, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the high probability / second
It shifts to the KT state and thereafter the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

Although this embodiment shows the case where the first KT state is ended when the variable display is uniformly performed 100 times when controlled to the low probability / first KT state, the present invention is limited to such an aspect. Absent. For example, a plurality of jackpot types that trigger low probability / first KT state are configured to be provided, and the number of fluctuation displays in which the first KT state continues after the jackpot game is different according to the jackpot type (for example, 20 times 30 times, 50 times, 100 times).

If it is after transitioning to the KT state (low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, high probability / second KT state), in this embodiment, the player looks to the right of the game area 7 Aim to launch the game ball (right strike). Therefore, in the KT state, mainly the second start winning opening 1
The start winning to 4 occurs, and the variable display of the second special symbol is mainly executed. When a big hit occurs in the KT state, transition to the low probability / first KT state, high probability / first KT state, or high probability / second KT state is made. For example, when 2R normal big hit occurs, transition to the low probability / first KT state is made, and thereafter, when 100 variable display is finished without occurrence of the big hit, the first KT state is finished to shift to the normal state. Also, for example, when 2R probability variation big hit or 6R probability variation big hit occurs, transition to the high probability / first KT state is performed, and thereafter, the high probability / first KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs. Also, for example, when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs, the state shifts to the high probability / second KT state, and thereafter, the high probability / second KT state is maintained until the next big hit occurs.

However, as described later, even if it was in the non-KT state before the big hit start, the second special symbol's variation display is executed and it becomes 16R certainty variation big hit, it shifts to high probability state However, control is made to shift to the first KT state instead of the second KT state (refer to steps S2208B and S2209B described later). That is, despite being the normal state, it is a case where the 16R certainty variation big hit occurs by the rightward strike and the 2nd special symbol's fluctuation display, and in such a case, it shifts to the 2 KT state and a considerable number in the small hit game If it is possible to obtain a prize ball, there is a possibility that some players actively play a game by right-handing in the normal state, and the original game property is lost. From this, even if the 16R probability variation big hit occurs by the variable display of the second special symbol right-handed in the normal state, by penalizing only by transitioning to the first KT state, in the normal state It is possible to suppress an aggressive right-handed game.

The variable display of the first special symbol in the first special symbol display 8a and the variable display of the first decorative symbol in the first variable display portion 9a are synchronized. Further, the variable display of the second special symbol in the second special symbol display 8b and the variable display of the second decorative symbol in the second variable display portion 9b are synchronized. Here, the synchronization means that the start point and the end point of the variable display are the same and the period of the variable display is the same. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the first variable display portion 9a. When the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variable display unit 9b.

Furthermore, when the odd variable symbol is stopped and displayed on the first special symbol display 8a, the decorative symbol (for example, "7") which reminds of the odd symbol is displayed on the first variable display unit 9a. When the odd symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, a special decorative symbol (for example, "7") which reminds of the odd symbol is displayed in the second variable display 9b.

Further, in the background symbol display section 9c, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is executed. For example,
Background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display section 9c. When the reach effect is performed, for example, the left and right background patterns are stopped and displayed during the variable display. And
As described later, there are exceptions, but basically, when the stop symbol of the first special symbol is derived and displayed in the first special symbol display 8a, the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed in the background symbol display section 9c. (The background pattern is finally stopped in the three display areas). When the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol, the stop symbol of the background symbol is a background symbol (for example, the left symbol that reminds the player that the stop symbol of the first special symbol is a big hit symbol) It becomes three background patterns in the state where the middle right is aligned. Hereinafter, such a background pattern is also referred to as a jackpot pattern.

When the second special symbol is variably displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, an effect corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is executed. For example, background symbols are variably displayed in three display areas in the background symbol display section 9c.

Also, when the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol is variably displayed in the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol and the second special symbol An effect corresponding to any one of the variable displays is executed.

And, when the first special symbol or the second special symbol is variably displayed alone, the first
When the variable display of the special symbol or the second special symbol is finished and the stop symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is derived and displayed, the variable display of the background symbol ends and the stop symbol of the background symbol is derived and displayed Be done. Also, when the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time,
Specifically, when there is a period during which the first special symbol and the second special symbol are variably displayed at the same time, the background symbol is displayed when the special symbol whose variable display is terminated is stopped and displayed. Variable display ends.

Next, the reach display mode (reach) will be described. The reach display mode (reach) in this embodiment is a variable display (variation display for a background pattern that has not been stopped yet when the stopped background pattern among the three background patterns constitutes a part of the big hit symbol). ), And all or part of the background symbols are displayed in synchronization with each other while constituting all or part of the jackpot symbols.

For example, in a state where a decorative symbol (for example, "7") to be a part of a big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the left and right display regions among the left, middle and right display regions in the background symbol display portion 9c. The display area inside is still in a state where variable display is performed, and the state in which all or part of the display area is synchronously displayed while constituting all or part of the big hit design (for example, background) The variation display is performed on all of the left, middle, and right display areas in the symbol display portion 9c, and the variation display is performed in a state in which the same symbol is always aligned is the reach display mode or reach.

In addition, at the time of reach, the effect which is different from usual is done with the lamp and the sound. The effect and the reach display mode in the background symbol display section 9c are referred to as reach effect. In addition, at the time of reach, the character (effect display imitating a person etc. and different from the background pattern) is displayed, or the background of the background pattern display portion 9c (the color and pattern of the ground different from the pattern and character Etc.) may be changed.

Next, FIGS. 2-4 is a figure which shows the special variable winning prize ball apparatus 22. FIG. Hereinafter, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 to 4. In addition, about this embodiment,
Although the structure of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 has been described using FIGS. The structure is the same as that of the ball device 22.

As shown in FIGS. 2 to 4, the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is provided with a rectangular base plate portion 101 long in the left-right direction. The special variable winning prize ball device 22 is fixedly supported on the game area 7 by fixing the base plate portion 101 to the game area 7 with, for example, a screw. Base plate 1
A special winning opening 24 (the second start winning opening 14 in the case of the variable winning ball device 15) opened toward the front is formed in a substantially central area of 01 and from the special winning opening 24 in the base plate portion 101. At the upper position, a slit-like housing hole 102 elongated in the left-right direction for housing the bottom member 23 on the back side (rear) of the game area 7 when the bottom member 23 moves backward is formed. . In the present embodiment, the special winning opening 24 is formed slightly to the left of the center of the base plate portion 101 in the left-right direction. However, the special winning opening 24 may be left or right.

The bottom surface member 23 is inclined downward to the left so that the gaming ball entering the top surface from the right is allowed to flow downward to the left, and the accommodation hole 102 is inclined downward to the left so as to follow the inclination of the bottom surface member 23 It is formed to be. The bottom member 23 is movable forward and backward in the state of forward movement shown in FIG. 3 and in the state of backward movement shown in FIG. A driving device (not shown) is disposed to move forward and backward.

Referring back to FIGS. 2 to 4, a flow path forming base 112 projecting forward is formed on the front side of the base plate 101, and a forward movement is formed on the upper side of the flow path forming base 112. The upstream region 23U which is the upper side end (right end) of the bottom surface member 23 and the upstream side flow passage portion 113 which is continuous with the bottom surface member 23 in the longitudinal direction and forms a flow path of gaming balls with the bottom surface member 23; Bottom member 2
A downstream region 23L, which is a lower end (left end) of the channel 3, and a downstream side channel portion 114 which is continuous with the bottom surface member 23 and forms a flow path of the game ball are formed.

Further, in the upper portion of the flow path forming base portion 112, the upstream flow path portion 113 and the downstream flow path portion 114 are provided.
A guide that guides the game ball dropped below the bottom member 23 to the special winning opening 24 by denting downward from the end on the bottom member 23 side and surrounding the special winning opening 24 from the left and right and below in front view A flow passage portion 115 is formed.

The upstream side channel portion 113 and the downstream side channel portion 114 are formed to be inclined downward to the left so as to allow the gaming ball to flow to the left. In addition, the bottom of the guide channel portion 115 is a special winning opening 2
While extending downward to the left toward the 4 side, it is recessed at a position in front of the special winning opening 24. Then, a triangular guide portion 116 for guiding the gaming ball backward toward the special winning opening 24 side (the back side of the game area 7) is disposed in the recessed space at the bottom of the guide flow path portion 115 ing.

Furthermore, in the front portion (player side) of the flow path forming base portion 112, the covering portion 117 covering the upstream flow path portion 113, the downstream flow path portion 114 and the guide flow path portion 115 from the front is integrally formed. It is done. By covering the upstream side channel portion 113, the downstream side channel portion 114, and the guide channel portion 115 from the front, the coating portion 117 causes the game balls flowing down the respective channel portions to bounce to the glass door frame 4 side. It has a function to prevent In the present embodiment, the covering portion 117 is integrally formed on the flow path forming base portion 112, but may be separately fixed.

In the special variable winning prize ball device 22, the flow of gaming balls connected in the left-right direction, which is composed of the upstream flow passage 113, the bottom member 23, and the downstream flow passage 114, between the base plate 101 and the cover 117. The passage F is formed. Here, in the present embodiment, the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed with a plurality of restriction pieces 118 for reducing the flow-down speed of the gaming ball flowing down the flow path F.

In the present embodiment, the restricting piece 118 is integrally formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117, and is formed in a rib shape which protrudes forward from the base plate portion 101 or protrudes backward from the covering portion 117. To change the flow direction of the game ball so that the game ball flowing down toward the left meanders with the movement of the longitudinal direction component, and there is no restriction piece 118 for the time taken for the flow Make it more delayed. These restricting pieces 118 are formed to line up at predetermined intervals in the flow-down direction of the gaming ball in the flow path F, and are alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117. Further, the restricting piece 118 is set to a width dimension of about 1/3 to 1/4 of the width in the front-rear direction of the bottom surface member 23, and set to a width dimension that allows game balls to pass between adjacent ones. There is. More specifically, in the present embodiment, one restriction piece 118 is formed at a portion of the covering portion 117 which covers the upstream side flow path portion 113 from the front, and the downstream side flow path portion of the covering portion 117 In the part covering 114 from the front, the regulation piece 118 is 1
One is formed. Further, at portions of the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 which cover the bottom surface member 23, a total of five restriction pieces 118 alternately formed on the base plate portion 101 and the covering portion 117 are formed. The number of such restriction pieces 118 is not particularly limited. Further, in the present embodiment, most of the restriction pieces 118 are covered by the covering portion 117 from the front (the player side).

With the arrangement of the restriction pieces 118 as described above, referring to FIG. 3, the special variable winning ball device 22 of this embodiment (and the similarly configured variable winning ball device 15) tries to flow down the flow path F. The game balls P will flow down in a meandering manner on the flow path F. And, when the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) in which such a flow path F is formed is closed, the gaming ball P is the special winning hole 24 (or the second start winning hole 14) Basically, the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 15) is passed without winning. On the other hand, referring to FIG. 4, the special variable winning ball device 22 (or the variable winning ball device 1) in which the bottom member 23 moves backward.
When 5) is opened, the gaming ball P can drop into the guide channel portion 115 of the channel forming base portion 112, and this guiding channel portion 115 flows down, and the special winning opening 24 ( Or second
It becomes possible to win the start winning opening 14).

FIG. 5 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the main board (game control board) 31. As shown in FIG. Note that FIG. 5 also shows the payout control board 37, the effect control board 80, and the like. The main substrate 31 is mounted with a game control microcomputer (corresponding to game control means) 560 for controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to a program. The game control microcomputer 560 has a ROM 54 for storing a program for game control (game progression control) and the like, a RAM 55 as storage means used as a work memory, a CPU 56 for performing control operations according to the program, and an I / O port unit 57 including. In this embodiment, the ROM 54 and the RAM 55 are incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560. That is, the game control microcomputer 560 is a one-chip microcomputer. The one-chip microcomputer only needs to incorporate at least the CPU 56 and the RAM 55, and the ROM 54 may be external or internal. Also, I / O port unit 57
May be external.

In the game control microcomputer 560, the CPU 56 executes control in accordance with the program stored in the ROM 54, so that the game control microcomputer 560 (or the CPU 56) executes (or performs processing) hereinafter. Specifically, the CPU 56 executes control according to a program. The same applies to a microcomputer mounted on another substrate other than the main substrate 31.

Also, detection signals from the first start opening switch 13a, the second start opening switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a and the operation gate switch 17a are given to the game control microcomputer 560 The input driver circuit 58 is also mounted on the main board 31, and the solenoid 21 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 20,
A solenoid 106 for opening and closing the special variable winning ball device 22 and an output circuit 59 for driving the solenoid 206 for opening and closing the variable winning ball device 15 in accordance with a command from the game control microcomputer 560 are also mounted on the main board 31. A system reset circuit (not shown) for resetting the microcomputer 560 for game control and an information output circuit for outputting an information output signal such as big hit information indicating occurrence of a big hit gaming state to an external device such as a hall computer The main substrate 31 is also mounted (not shown). The main substrate 31
A test signal output circuit (not shown) for outputting a test signal to the outside of the gaming machine is also provided.

In this embodiment, the effect control means (composed of the effect control microcomputer) mounted on the effect control board 80 performs the effect control command from the game control microcomputer 560 via the relay board 77. The display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b for variably displaying the decorative symbol, the background symbol display unit 9c for variably displaying the background symbol, and the symbol hold storage display unit 18c is performed.

FIG. 6 is a block diagram showing an example of the circuit configuration of the relay board 77, the effect control board 80, the lamp driver board 35, and the sound output board 70. As shown in FIG. In the example shown in FIG. 6, the microcomputer is not mounted on the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70, but a microcomputer may be mounted. Further, only the effect control substrate 80 may be provided for effect control without providing the lamp driver substrate 35 and the sound output substrate 70.

The effect control board 80 is mounted with an effect control microcomputer 200 including an effect control CPU 201 and a RAM. The RAM may be externally attached. In the effect control board 80, the effect control CPU 201 operates according to a program stored in a built-in or external ROM (not shown) and takes in a signal taken from the main board 31 input via the relay board 77 ( Input driver 202 and input port 20 according to the effect control INT signal).
Receive effect control command via 3. Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the VDP (video display processor) 209 to perform display control of the effect display device 9 based on the effect control command.

The effect control command and the effect control INT signal are first input to the input driver 202 in the effect control board 80. The input driver 202 only passes the signal input from the relay board 77 in the direction toward the inside of the effect control board 80 (does not pass the signal from the inside of the effect control board 80 to the relay board 77) It is also a unidirectional circuit as a regulation means.

As a signal direction regulation means which allows the signal input from the main substrate 31 to pass only in the direction toward the effect control substrate 80 (does not allow the signal to pass in the direction from the effect control substrate 80 to the relay substrate 77) in the relay substrate 77 A unidirectional circuit 74 is mounted. As a unidirectional circuit
For example, a diode or a transistor is used. A diode is illustrated in FIG. Also, unidirectional circuits are provided for each signal. Further, since the effect control command and the effect control INT signal are output from the main board 31 through the output port 571 which is a unidirectional circuit, the signal from the relay board 77 toward the inside of the main board 31 is restricted. That is, the signal from the relay board 77 does not enter the inside of the main board 31 (the game control microcomputer 560 side). The output port 571 is part of the I / O port unit 57 shown in FIG. In addition, a signal driver circuit which is a unidirectional circuit may be further provided outside the output port 571 (the relay board 77 side).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs a signal for driving the lamp to the lamp driver board 35 via the input / output port 205. Further, the effect control CPU 201 outputs sound number data to the sound output board 70 via the input / output port 204.

In the lamp driver board 35, a signal for driving the lamp is input to the lamp driver 352 via the input / output driver 351. The lamp driver 352 amplifies a signal for driving the lamps and supplies the amplified signals to the lamps provided on the frame side, such as the sky lamp 28 a, the left frame lamp 28 b, and the right frame lamp 28 c. Moreover, it supplies to the decoration lamp 25 provided in the frame side. Furthermore, in this embodiment, the special winning opening lamp 24a is installed in the special variable winning ball device 22.
The lamp driver 352 amplifies the signal for driving the lamp and supplies it to the special winning opening lamp 24a.

In the voice output board 70, the sound number data is input to the voice synthesis IC 703 via the input / output driver 702. The speech synthesis IC 703 generates speech and sound effects according to the sound number data and outputs the speech and the sound effects to the amplification circuit 705. The amplifier circuit 705 outputs to the speaker 27 an audio signal obtained by amplifying the output level of the voice synthesis IC 703 to a level according to the volume set by the volume 706. The voice data ROM 704 stores control data corresponding to the sound number data. The control data corresponding to the sound number data is a collection of data indicating in time series the output mode of sound effects or sounds in a predetermined period (for example, a fluctuation period of a decorative pattern).

Note that the signal for driving the lamp and the sound number data are bidirectional communication (such as transmitting a response signal from the signal receiving side to the transmitting side) between the effect control CPU 201 and the lamp driver board 35 and the audio output board 70. Communication).

The effect control CPU 201 reads out necessary data from the character ROM (not shown) in accordance with the received effect control command. The character ROM stores in advance character image data that is frequently used among images displayed on the effect display device 9, specifically, a person, characters, figures, symbols, etc. (including decorative patterns and background patterns). It is for keeping.
The effect control CPU 201 outputs the data read from the character ROM to the VDP 209. The VDP 209 executes display control based on data input from the CPU 201 for effect control.

In this embodiment, the VDP 209 for performing display control of the effect display device 9 is the effect control board 8
It is loaded on 0. The VDP 209 has an address space independent of the effect control microcomputer 200, and maps the VRAM there. The VRAM is a buffer memory for expanding image data generated by the VDP. And VDP 209
Outputs the image data in the VRAM to the effect display device 9.

In this embodiment, the effect control board 80, the audio output board 70, and the lamp driver board 35 are provided as substrates on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the circuit for controlling the effect device is one It may be mounted on two substrates. Furthermore, a first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the effect display device 9 is mounted, and other effect devices (lamps,
Two substrates may be provided with a second effect control substrate mounted with a circuit for controlling the LED, the speaker 27 and the like. Further, in this embodiment, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but another board (for example, the voice output board 70 or the lamp shown in FIG. 6) It may be transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 in the effect control substrate 80 via the driver substrate 35 or the like. In that case, the command may simply pass through the other substrate, or a control means such as a microcomputer is mounted on the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35, and the control means receives the command. The control related to voice control and lamp control is executed, and further, the received command is transmitted as it is or, for example, a simplified command, to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9 May be Further, when two substrates of the first effect control substrate and the second effect control substrate are provided, the command regarding the effect from the game control microcomputer 560 is transmitted to the second effect control substrate, Send a command from the second effect control board to the first effect control board as it is, or send it after processing (for example, changing the form or content of the command or simplification, selecting only the necessary command) It may be configured to be

Next, the operation of the gaming machine will be described. FIG. 7 is a flow chart showing the main processing executed by the game control microcomputer 560 on the main substrate 31. When power is supplied to the gaming machine and the input level of the reset terminal to which the reset signal is input becomes high level, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether the content of the program is valid. After the security check process, which is a process for confirming whether or not there is, the main process after step S1 is started. In the main processing, the CPU 56 first performs necessary initialization.

In the initial setting process, the CPU 56 first sets interrupt prohibition (step S1).
Next, the interrupt mode is set to the interrupt mode 2 (step S2), and the stack pointer designation address is set in the stack pointer (step S3). Then, initialize the built-in device (
The CTC (counter / timer) and PIO (parallel input / output port), which are built-in devices (built-in peripheral circuits), are initialized (step S4). In interrupt mode 2, C
An address composed of the value (1 byte) of the specific register (I register) built in the PU 56 and the interrupt vector (1 byte: least significant bit 0) output from the built-in device is a mode indicating an interrupt address.

Next, the CPU 56 confirms the state of the output signal of the clear switch (for example, mounted on the power supply substrate) input via the input port only once (step S6). When ON is detected in the confirmation, the CPU 56 executes a normal initialization process (steps S10 to S15).

If the clear switch is not in the ON state, it is checked whether data protection processing (for example, processing at the time of power supply stop such as addition of parity data) of the backup RAM area is performed when power supply to the gaming machine is stopped. (Step S7). After confirming that such protection processing has not been performed, the CPU 56 executes initialization processing. Whether or not there is backup data in the backup RAM area is confirmed by, for example, the state of the backup flag set in the backup RAM area in the power supply stop processing. In this example, if “55H” is set in the backup flag area, it means that backup is on (on state), and if a value other than “55H” is set, it means no backup (off state).

If it is confirmed that there is backup, the CPU 56 performs data check (parity check in this example) of the backup RAM area (step S8). In step S8, the calculated checksum is compared with the checksum calculated and stored by the same process in the power supply stop process. If recovery is performed after a power supply stop such as an unexpected power failure occurs, the data in the backup RAM area should be saved, so the check result (comparison result) becomes normal (match). If the check result is not normal, it means that the data in the backup RAM area is different from the data at the time of the power supply interruption. In such a case, since the internal state can not be returned to the state at the time of the power supply stop, the initialization process executed at the time of power-on not at the time of recovery from the stop of the power supply is executed.

If the check result is normal, the CPU 56 performs gaming state recovery processing for returning the internal state of the game control means and the control state of the electric component control means such as the effect control means to the state at the time of the power supply stop. Specifically, the top address of the backup setting table stored in the ROM 54 is set as a pointer (step S91), and the contents of the backup setting table are sequentially set in the work area (the area in the RAM 55) (step S92). ). The work area is backed up by a backup power supply. In the backup setting table, initialization data for an area that may be initialized in the work area is set. Step S
By the processing at 91 and S92, the saved content remains as it is for the portion of the work area that should not be initialized. The parts that should not be initialized are, for example, data (such as a special symbol process flag) indicating the gaming state before the power supply is stopped, an area in which the output state of the output port is stored (output port buffer) It is a part where data indicating the number is set.

Further, the CPU 56 sets the top address of the backup command transmission table stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S93), and a control command (power) indicating that power supply has been restored to the effect control board 80 according to the content. Control is performed so as to transmit a recovery command as an initialization command at the time of supply recovery (step S94). Then, the process proceeds to step S15.

In this embodiment, although both the backup flag and the check data are used to check whether the data in the backup RAM area is stored or not, only one of them may be used. That is, either the backup flag or the check data may be used as a trigger for executing the state recovery process.

In the initialization process, the CPU 56 first performs a RAM clear process (step S10).
Note that predetermined data (for example, data of a count value of a counter for generating a jackpot determination random number) may be left as it is without initializing the entire area of the RAM 55. Also, ROM 54
Set the start address of the initialization setting table stored in to the pointer (Step S
11) The contents of the initialization setting table are sequentially set in the work area (step S12).

By the processing of steps S11 and S12, for example, a special symbol buffer, a total prize ball number storage buffer, a special symbol process flag, a prize ball middle flag, a ball out flag, a payout stop flag, etc. are selectively processed according to the control state. The initial value is set to the flag for

The CPU 56 sets the start address of the command transmission table for initialization stored in the ROM 54 as a pointer (step S13), and transmits an initialization command for initializing the sub board according to the contents to the sub board A process is performed (step S14). As the initialization command, there is a command indicating an initial symbol displayed on the effect display device 9 or the like.

Then, in step S15, the CPU 56 sets the register of the CTC incorporated in the game control microcomputer 560 so that a timer interrupt is periodically generated every predetermined time (for example, 4 ms). That is, a value corresponding to 4 ms, for example, is set as an initial value in a predetermined register (time constant register). In this embodiment, it is assumed that a timer interrupt is periodically performed every 4 ms.

When the execution of the initialization process (steps S10 to S15) is completed, the CPU 56 performs the display random number update process (step S17) and the initial value random number update process (step S17) in the main process.
Repeat step 18). When executing display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing, interrupt disabled state is set (step S16), and when execution of display random number update processing and initial value random number update processing is completed, interrupt permitted state is set. It sets (step S19). In this embodiment, the display random number is a random number for determining the variation pattern, and the display random number update process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the display random number.
The initial value random number updating process is a process of updating the count value of the counter for generating the initial value random number. The initial value random number is a random number for determining the initial value of the count value, such as a counter for generating a random number for determining whether to make a big hit or not (big hit determination random number generation counter). The game control process for controlling the progress of the game to be described later (The game control microcomputer 560 controls the game display devices such as the effect display device provided in the game machine, the variable winning ball device, the ball payout device, etc. by itself In the processing to send or command signal to control other microcomputers, also referred to as gaming device control processing), the count value of the big hit judgment random number generation counter etc. is 1 round (the big hit judgment random number generation counter etc When an increment of the number of numerical values between the minimum value and the maximum value of possible values of A) is made, an initial value is set to the counter.

When a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 56 executes the timer interrupt process of steps S20 to S34 shown in FIG. In the timer interrupt process, first, whether or not the power off signal is output (
A power-off detection process is performed to detect whether or not the power is on (step S20). The power-off signal is output, for example, when the voltage drop monitoring circuit mounted on the power supply substrate detects a drop in the voltage of the power supplied to the game machine. And, in the power failure detection process, CPU
56, when it detects that the power off signal is output, it backs up necessary data
Execute the power supply stop processing for saving in the area. Then, through the input driver circuit 58, the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 2
3a, the second count switch 25a, the gate switch 32a, and the detection signal of the operation gate switch 17a are input, and the state determination of them is performed (switch processing: step S21)
.

Next, the CPU 56 performs display control processing for performing display control of the first special symbol display 8a, the second special symbol display 8b, the first special symbol hold storage indicator 18a and the second special symbol hold storage indicator 18b Execute (step S22). For the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b, control is performed to output a drive signal to each display according to the contents of the output buffer set in step S32.

Next, processing is performed to update the count value of each counter for generating each determination random number such as a jackpot determination random number used for game control (determination random number update process: step S23).
The CPU 56 further performs processing for updating the initial value random number and the count value of the counter for generating the display random number (initial value random number updating process, display random number updating process: step S
24, S 25).

FIG. 9 is an explanatory view showing each random number. Each random number is used as follows.
(1) Random 1: Determine whether or not to generate a big hit, or whether to generate a small hit (for a big hit determination)
(2) Random 2: Type of big hit, that is, 2R normal big hit, 2R positive variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 6R positive variation big hit, and 16R positive variation big hit or not (for big hit type determination)
(3) Random 5: Determine the variation pattern of the special symbol (for variation pattern determination)
(4) Random 6: Determine whether or not to generate a hit based on the normal symbol (for normal symbol determination)
(5) Random 7: Determine the initial value of random 1 (for random 1 initial value determination)
(6) Random 8: Determine the initial value of random 6 (for determining the initial value of random 6)

In step S23 in the game control process shown in FIG. 8, the game control microcomputer 560 is configured to determine the jackpot determination random number of (1), the jackpot type determination random number of (2), and
The counter is counted up (one added) to generate a random number for determining a normal symbol per symbol. That is, those are the judgment random numbers, and the other random numbers are the display random numbers or the initial value random numbers. Note that random numbers other than the above random numbers (1) to (6) are also used to enhance the gaming effect. Further, although in the present embodiment the common random number (random 2) is provided as the random number for determining the type of the big hit and the random number for determining the type of the small hit, different random numbers are provided. May be

Further, the CPU 56 performs a first special symbol process process (step S26A). First
In the special symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with a first special symbol process flag for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning prize ball device 20 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag during each processing according to the gaming state. Next, the CPU 56 performs a second special symbol process process (step S26B). In the second special symbol process processing, depending on the gaming state second special symbol indicator 8b
And special variable winning ball device 20, a second for controlling the special variable winning ball device 22 in a predetermined order
Execute the corresponding processing according to the special symbol process flag. CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag during each processing according to the gaming state. And CPU56,
A normal symbol process process is performed (step S26C). In the normal symbol process processing, the corresponding processing is executed in accordance with the normal symbol process flag for controlling the normal symbol display 10 and the variable winning ball device 15 in a predetermined order according to the gaming state. The CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag during each process according to the gaming state.

Next, the CPU 56 performs a hold storage process (step S27a). In the pending storage process, the CPU 56 executes a process of calculating and managing the total number (total pending storage number) which is the sum of the first pending storage number and the second pending storage number.

Next, the CPU 56 performs processing for sending out effect control commands related to display control of the first variable display unit 9a and the second variable display unit 9b and effect control commands related to the number of pending storages (effect control command control process: step S28).

Further, the CPU 56 performs an information output process of outputting data such as big hit information, start information, probability fluctuation information and the like supplied to the hole management computer, for example (step S29).

Further, the CPU 56 executes an award ball process for setting the number of award balls based on detection signals of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a. (Step S30). Specifically, the payout control board 37 is detected according to the winning detection based on any one of the first start port switch 13a, the second start port switch 14a, the first count switch 23a, and the second count switch 25a being turned on. The payout control command indicating the number of winning balls is output to the payout control microcomputer mounted on the. The payout control microcomputer drives the ball dispenser 97 in accordance with the payout control command indicating the number of winning balls.

In this embodiment, a RAM area (output port buffer) corresponding to the output state of the output port is provided, but the CPU 56 uses the contents related to the ON / OFF of the solenoid in the RAM area of the output port as the output port. Output (step S31: output processing)
.

In addition, CPU 56 sets the first special symbol display control data for performing effect display of the first special symbol according to the value of the first special symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting the first special symbol display control data. In addition, according to the value of the second special symbol process flag, the second special symbol display control data for performing the effect display of the second special symbol is set in the output buffer for the second special symbol display control data setting special symbol display Control processing is performed (step S32). CPU 56
For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 every 0.2 seconds. Further, the CPU 56 outputs the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer, thereby variably displaying the special symbols in the first special symbol display 8a and the second special symbol display 8b. Run.

Also, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol display control processing of setting normal symbol display control data for performing effect display of normal symbols according to the value of the normal symbol process flag in the output buffer for setting normal symbol display control data ( Step S33). For example, if the fluctuation speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the CPU 56 adds 1 to the value of the display control data set in the output buffer every time 0.2 seconds elapses. Further, the CPU 56 executes the variable display of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display 10 by outputting the drive signal in step S22 according to the display control data set in the output buffer. Thereafter, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S34), and the process is ended.

By the above control, in this embodiment, the game control process is activated every 4 ms. The game control process corresponds to the process of steps S21 to S33 (excluding step S29) in the timer interrupt process. Further, in this embodiment, the game control process is executed in the timer interrupt process, but in the timer interrupt process, for example, only a flag indicating that an interrupt has occurred is set, and the game control process is the main process. May be performed in

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the second special symbol is executed by two indicators of the first special symbol indicator 8a and the second special symbol indicator 8b.
6 performs control so that a big hit does not occur simultaneously in two displays.

FIG. 10 is an explanatory view of a big hit determination table. The big hit judgment table is the ROM
It is a collection of data stored in 54, and is a table in which a jackpot determination value to be compared with random 1 is set. In the big hit judgment table, low probability state (low probability / non-KT
State, low probability / first KT state) non-probability large jackpot determination table used, and positive variation state (high probability / 1st KT state, high probability / 2nd KT state) probability variation big hit determination table used There is. Each numerical value described in the left column of FIG. 10 is set in the non-probable occasional jackpot determination table, and each numerical value described in the right column in FIG. . The numerical values described in FIG. 10 are the jackpot determination values.

The CPU 56 extracts the count value of the random number circuit 503 at a predetermined time and sets the extracted value as the value of the big hit determination random number (random 1), but the big hit determination random value is any one shown in FIG. If it matches with the big hit judgment value, it decides to make a big hit regarding the special symbol. The “probability” shown in FIG. 10 indicates the probability (percentage) of becoming a big hit. In addition, deciding whether or not to make a big hit is deciding whether or not to shift to a big hit gaming state, but the stop symbol in the first special symbol display 8a or the second special symbol display 8b It is also to decide whether or not to make it a jackpot symbol.

In addition, in this embodiment, when it is determined not to be a big hit when performing the variable display of the first special symbol, it is unconditionally all off. In addition, if it is decided not to be a big hit when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, it will be unconditionally all small hit (but, as will be described later, it will be forced forced off as described later There is a case).

FIG. 11 is an explanatory view showing the jackpot type determination table 131a stored in the ROM 54. As shown in FIG. The big hit type determination table 131a determines the type of the big hit "2R normal big hit" based on the random number for the big hit type determination (random 2) when it is determined that the variable display result is made a big hit symbol, "2R Positive variation big hit ", 6R normal big hit", "6R positive variation big hit"
Or a table referred to in order to determine “16R probability variation big hit”.

As shown in FIG. 11 (A), in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, it is determined that "16R probability variation big hit" with a probability of 20%, and "with a probability of 45%" It is determined that "6R probability variation big hit", and is determined as "6R normal big hit" with a 35% probability. Also, FIG.
As shown in B), in this embodiment, in the case of executing variable display of the second special symbol,
30% probability is determined as "16R probability variation big hit", 30% probability is determined as "6R probability variation big hit", 5% probability is determined as "2R probability variation big hit", 35% probability is "2R It is determined that "big hit".

"16R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls to 16 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to high probability / second KT state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment,
The transition to the positive change state and the transition to the second KT state are made. Step S220 described later
7A, S2208A, S2207B, S2210B). Then, the positive change state and the second KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

However, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, if it is a non-KT state before the start of the big hit, even if it becomes "16R positive variation big hit", it is not the 2nd KT state There may be a transition to the first KT state (steps S2208B and S2209B described later)
reference).

The "6R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls the game to 6 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to the high probability / first KT state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is shifted to a probability change state Together with the first KT state, step S2210A described later.
, S2211A, S2212B, and S2213B). Then, the positive change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

"6R Normal Big Hit" is a big hit that controls the game to 6 rounds of big hit gaming state and shifts to only the first KT state after the big hit gaming state ends (step S2212A described later)
reference). Then, after transitioning to the first KT state, the first KT state is ended when the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) (steps S2213A, S2010-S.
See 2013). The first KT state is ended even if the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (see step S2015).

"2R probability variation big hit" is a big hit that controls to 2 rounds of big hit gaming state, and shifts to high probability / 1st KT state after the big hit gaming state ends (in this embodiment, it is transferred to a positive variation state Together with the first KT state, step S2212B described later.
, S2213 B)). Then, the positive change state and the first KT state continue until the next big hit occurs (see step S2015).

"2R Normal Big Hit" is a big hit that controls to 2 rounds of big hit gaming state and shifts to only the 1 KT state after the big hit gaming state ends (step S2214B described later)
reference). Then, after transitioning to the first KT state, the first KT state is ended when the variable display is finished a predetermined number of times (100 times in this embodiment) (steps S2215B, S2010-S.
See 2013). The first KT state is ended even if the next big hit occurs even before the variable display is ended a predetermined number of times (see step S2015).

The type of jackpot type is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. In the case of executing the second special symbol variation display, 3R probability variation big hit to 7R probability variation big hit may be determined other than 16R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit, and 2R usual big hit, and various aspects are considered Be

12 to 14 are explanatory diagrams showing variation patterns (variation time) of the special symbol and the decorative symbol used in this embodiment. The EXT shown in FIGS. 12 to 14 is data of the second byte of the effect control command (2-byte configuration) corresponding to each variation pattern.

In the example shown in FIGS. 12 to 14, seven types of first variation patterns # 01 to # 07 for the first special symbol and the first decorative symbol, and a second variation pattern for the second special symbol and the second decorative symbol The 18 types of # 01 to # 18 are used. For example, fluctuation pattern #n (n
When = 0 1 to 07 or 01 to 18), it means both the first variation pattern #n and the second variation pattern #n.

When the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the first special symbol variable pattern table for non-KT shown in FIG. It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown to FIG. 12 (A), when the fluctuation display of a 1st special symbol is performed in a non-KT state, it is determined to either of 1st fluctuation pattern # 01-# 05.

KT state (low probability / 1st KT state, high probability / when performing variable display of the first special symbol
In the case of the first KT state (high probability / second KT state), the first special symbol variation pattern table for KT shown in FIG. 12B is selected to determine the variation pattern. Figure 12 (
As shown in B), when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed in the KT state, one of the first fluctuation patterns # 06 to # 07 is determined.

When performing variable display of the second special symbol, in the non-KT state (low probability / non KT state), the second special symbol for the non-KT variation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (C) It is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13C, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the non-KT state, one of the second fluctuation patterns # 01 to # 02 is determined. Specifically, when it is determined to be a small hit, the second variation pattern # 01 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a long period of 15 minutes. Also, when it is determined to be a big hit, the second variation pattern # 02 is determined, and the variation display of the second special symbol is executed over a relatively long period of 5 minutes.

In this embodiment, even in the non-KT state, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed and it becomes a small hit, there is a situation where a certain winning ball can be expected by the winning of the game ball to the special winning opening 24. It will occur. Therefore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13C, even if the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is extremely lengthened and the execution frequency of the variable display is reduced. By doing this, the frequency of occurrence of small hits is reduced rather than the situation, and it is prevented that the goal is to obtain a prize ball by small hits despite being in the non-KT state.
In this embodiment, the “small hit occurrence frequency” is, for example, the occurrence ratio of small hits per unit time (for example, one minute), and in the KT state, for example, the small hits per unit time The occurrence rate of is higher than the normal state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 13 (C), when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed during the non-KT state, the fluctuation time is 5 even if it is a big hit. By making the time relatively long, it is intended to prevent an action of aiming at a winning ball by winning in the special winning opening 24 unfairly during non-KT state. However, in the case of a big hit, it is not necessary to lengthen the digestion of the first reserved memory compared to the case of a small hit, so that the variation time is shorter than in the case of a small hit. There is.

When performing the variable display of the second special symbol, in the case of low probability / first KT state, the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state ends The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. in this case,
In the case of executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for low probability / first KT and for the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 13D is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. . As shown in FIG. 13D, when the second special symbol is displayed as the first change in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be any of the second change patterns # 03 to # 04. Be done.

As shown in FIG. 13D, when it is determined that the small hit is the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second change is a relatively long change time of 7 seconds as the small hit. pattern#
It is determined to be 03 (a variation pattern for preparation for opening the second start winning opening). In this embodiment,
As described above, when controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of the small hit is high, the special variable winning ball device 2 is actually increased by increasing the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15
The special winning opening 24 in 2 is set so as to rarely win. However, in the state immediately after shifting to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 2
There is a possibility that some game balls are accumulated on the bottom member of 2, and if the special variable winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of game balls win the special winning hole 24 There is a possibility of Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 is made before shifting to the first KT state. The special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to an open state after sufficient time has elapsed until all the gaming balls accumulated on the bottom member fall, thereby enabling winning in the special winning opening 24. It prevents occurrence of a situation where more than expected prize balls are obtained in the first KT state.

Also, in the case of executing the fluctuation display of the second to 99th fluctuation after ending the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, FIG.
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and second to 99th variation eyes shown in (E) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13E, low probability / first
When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second to 99th fluctuation of the KT state, one of the second fluctuation patterns # 05 to # 07 and # 30 is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 13E, when it is determined to be a small hit as the second probability to the 99th fluctuation of the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 05 of the fluctuation fluctuation Alternatively, the fluctuation time may be determined to be a second fluctuation pattern # 030 of a shortening fluctuation, which is further shortened to 1 second. The second variation pattern # 05 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second pending storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 30 can be selected only when one or more second pending storages are stored. It is a fluctuation pattern. Thereby, the system is configured to expedite the retention memory and to increase the operation rate. In this embodiment, the small probability is determined as the second to 99th variation of the low probability / first KT state, and the second
When the fluctuation display is executed based on the fluctuation pattern # 06, in the fluctuation display of the background symbol in the effect display device 9, an effect such as reaching a reach or sliding effect is executed.

In addition, after the big hit game based on the 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit that triggered the low probability / first KT state, the fluctuation display of 100th fluctuation (that is, the low probability / final change in the first KT state) is executed. If it is the case, the second special symbol variation pattern table for the low probability / first KT and 100th variation eye shown in FIG. 13F is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 13 (F), when the second special symbol is displayed as the 100th variable in the low probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second fluctuation patterns # 08 to # 09. Be done.

In this embodiment, when controlled to the low probability / first KT state, for example, character display such as “during a chance time” is displayed on the effect display device 9. As shown in FIG. 13F, when it is determined to be a small hit as the 100th item in the low probability / first KT state, an end display in which characters such as “chance time end !!” are displayed on the effect display device 9 In the second variation pattern # 08 with. Also, as shown in FIG.
When it is determined that a big hit is made as the 100th change of the KT state, a second display accompanied by a predetermined revival display after an end display in which characters such as “chance time end !!” are displayed on the effect display device 9
It is determined to change pattern # 09.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 12, in the case of a big hit in the fluctuation display of the first special symbol during the KT state, the first fluctuation pattern # 07 having a fluctuation time of 10 seconds is determined. Is configured as. This is in the case where a big hit occurs immediately in the first special symbol's variation display immediately after the transition to the second KT state, if the variation time of the first special symbol's big hit variation is taken as a long variation time, Because the variation of the second special symbol executed during the big hit variation of the first special symbol is a configuration that is forced off, forced detachment frequently occurs even though the second KT state, the player hit the small hit You will not receive any benefit from for that reason,
In this embodiment, by setting the fluctuation time of the jackpot fluctuation of the first special symbol as a short fluctuation time, it is configured to shift to the jackpot gaming state based on the fluctuation of the first special symbol before the forced release frequently occurs. ing.

In addition, unlike the present embodiment, even when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, the configuration that does not force the variation of the second special symbol (for example, the first symbol) When the second special symbol is changing at the big hit symbol stop of the special symbol, if it is a game machine with the second special symbol being forced forced off, the big hit fluctuation time of the first special symbol in the KT state May be a long fluctuation time (for example, one minute). This is the case where a big hit occurs immediately after the transition to the second KT state in the variable display of the first special symbol, and if the big hit change time is as short as the removal time, the player can You will not receive any benefit from the small hit. Therefore, if the fluctuation time of the big hit of the first special symbol in the KT state is long fluctuation time (for example, 1 minute), even in such a case, sufficient time that small hits can occur at least a plurality of times It is configured to secure (for example, one minute).

When executing the second special symbol variation display, in the case of high probability / first KT state, end the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT status The variation pattern table is selected according to the number of variations since then. in this case,
In the case of executing the fluctuation display of the first fluctuation, the second special symbol fluctuation pattern table for high probability / first KT and for the first fluctuation shown in FIG. 14G is selected and the fluctuation pattern is determined. . As shown in FIG. 14 (G), when the second special symbol is displayed as the first change in the high probability / first KT state, it is determined to be one of the second change patterns # 10 to # 12. Be done.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), similarly to the first change of the low probability / first KT state, the second start winning combination is also determined when the small change is determined as the first change of the high probability / first KT state. It may be determined to the fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern # 10) for preparation for opening the mouth. Also, FIG. 14 (G
As shown in), when deciding to be a big hit as the first change of the high probability / first KT state, the second change including a battle effect to indicate whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends. Pattern # 12 is determined. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 (G), 1 in the high probability / first KT state
Even when it is determined to be a small hit as the fluctuation, the second fluctuation pattern # 11 including the battle effect may be determined.

In addition, if it is the case that the fluctuation display of the second and subsequent fluctuation is performed after the big hit game based on the 6R probability variation big hit and the 2R probability variation big hit that triggered the high probability / first KT state is executed, as shown in FIG.
The second special symbol variation pattern table for the high probability / first KT and for the second and subsequent variation shown in H) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14H, high probability / first KT
When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol is executed as the second fluctuation of the state or later, one of the second fluctuation patterns # 13 to # 15 and # 31 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 14H, as in the second to 99th variation of the low probability / first KT state,
In the case of determining the small hit as the second probability of the high probability / first KT state or later, the fluctuation time is as short as 5 seconds, and the second fluctuation pattern # 13 of fluctuation fluctuation or the fluctuation time is further shortened to 1 second The second variation pattern # 031 may be determined. The second variation pattern # 13 is a variation pattern that can be selected only when the second pending storage is not stored, and the second variation pattern # 3
A variable pattern 1 can be selected only when one or more second pending memories are stored.
Thereby, the system is configured to expedite the retention memory and to increase the operation rate.

Also, as shown in FIG. 14 (H), when it is determined to be a big hit as the high probability / the second fluctuation of the first KT state or later, it is suggested to indicate whether the probability change state (high probability state) ends. The second variation pattern # 15 including the battle effect is determined. Further, as shown in FIG. 14H, even when it is determined to be a small hit as the high probability / the second change of the first KT state or later, the second change pattern # 14 including the battle effect may be determined. .

In the case of executing the second special symbol variation display, in the case of high probability / second KT state, Figure 1
The second special symbol variation pattern table for high probability / second KT shown in 4 (I) is selected, and the variation pattern is determined. As shown in FIG. 14I, when the variable display of the second special symbol is executed in the high probability / second KT state, one of the second fluctuation patterns # 16 to # 18 is determined.

As shown in FIG. 14I, when it is determined to be a small hit in the high probability / second KT state, the shortening fluctuation in the first KT state (low probability / first 1 KT state, high probability / first KT state) The variation time may be determined to be a second variation pattern # 16 of the shortening variation, which is further shortened to 1.5 seconds than when the variation display is performed. Also, as shown in FIG.
When it is determined to be a small hit in the second KT state, it may be determined to be the second variation pattern # 17 including a continuous effect indicating whether the high probability / the second KT state continues. Also, as shown in FIG. 14 (I), when it is determined to be a big hit in the high probability / second KT state, a battle for suggesting whether or not the probability change state (high probability state) ends after the continuous rendering. The second variation pattern # 18 including the effect is determined.

In this embodiment, if it is determined that the fluctuation pattern includes the continuous effect and the battle effect, the continuous effect and the battle effect are executed in the variable display of the background symbol in the effect display device 9, In the case of a big hit (16R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 2R probability variation big hit) production of the aspect of the victory is executed in the battle production, usually when a big hit (6R normal big hit, 2R normal big hit) in battle production The effect of the defeat mode is executed, and when it is a small hit, the effect of the draw mode is executed in the battle effect. It is to be noted that not only the mode shown in this embodiment, for example, also when the number of rounds in the big hit game is a small 2R probability variation big hit may be configured to be executed the effect of the defeat mode in the battle production .

Further, in the example shown in FIGS. 13 and 14, the shortening variation of 5 seconds or 1 second is executed in the first KT state, and the shortening variation of 1.5 seconds is executed in the second KT state. Although the case is shown, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it may be configured to perform a 5 second or 1 second reduction variation for low probability conditions and a 1.5 second reduction variation for high probability conditions.

Next, the opening patterns of the variable winning prize ball device 15 and the special variable winning prize ball device 22 in the KT state will be described. FIG. 15 is an explanatory view for explaining an opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 15 and the special variable winning prize ball device 22 in the KT state. Of these, FIG. 15 (1)
Shows the release pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state, and FIG. Is shown.

First, with reference to FIG. 15A, the opening pattern of the variable winning ball device 15 and the special variable winning ball device 22 in the first KT state will be described. As shown in FIG. 15 (1), when the gaming ball passes through the gate 32 and the gaming ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the variation display of the normal symbol is executed in the normal symbol display 10, and a common figure is hit When it is decided, the hit symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 10 and the symbol is derived and displayed, and when it is decided that the off is decided, the normal symbol display 10
The inset symbol is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variation time of the normal symbol is 0.2 seconds, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying a hit symbol or an off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after 0.2 seconds of symbol determination time has elapsed, 0.1 second of time before the second start winning opening opening process has elapsed After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and the game ball can win in the second start winning opening 14.

When a game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and it is determined to be a small hit. , A small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. When the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds as shown in FIG. It becomes. However, in the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), the opening time of the special variable winning ball device 22 on the downstream side is 0. 0.
The open time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is as long as 5.5 seconds, whereas it is as short as 8 seconds. Therefore, in the first KT state, although the small hit is likely to occur, it is extremely rare that the game ball will win the special winning opening 24 (for example, about 1 ball for every 100 fluctuation display).

In the first KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (1), after the release of the variable winning ball device 15 is finished, the next variable winning ball device 15 can be released after the next normal symbol fluctuation time 0.2
It is after at least 0.5 seconds which is the total of the second, the symbol determination time 0.2 seconds and the second start winning opening opening pre-treatment time 0.1 seconds. Therefore, in this embodiment, in the first KT state, a closed period of at least 0.5 seconds is provided as an interval period after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, after the game ball passes through the gate 32 in a state in which the variation of the normal symbol is not performed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state. Pattern variation time 0.2 seconds, symbol decision time 0.2 seconds and second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 0.
The time required for the game ball to pass through the gate 32 and reach the variable winning ball device 15 is approximately 0.6 seconds, after 0.5 seconds which is the total of one second, has elapsed. It is done. As described above, in the first KT state, it is the time from when the gaming ball passes the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, with no variation of the normal symbol being performed,
The variable winning ball device 15 has already been opened since it is shorter than the time it takes the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after the gaming ball passes through the gate 32 in a state where no variation of the normal symbol is performed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 when being controlled to. Therefore, in the first KT state, the gaming ball that has passed through the gate 32 in a state in which the variation of the normal symbol is not performed is likely to win the variable winning ball device 15.

Next, the opening pattern of the variable winning prize ball device 15 and the special variable winning prize ball device 22 in the second KT state will be described using FIG. As shown in FIG. 15 (2), when the game ball passes through the gate 32 and the game ball is detected by the gate switch 32a, the normal symbol display 10 carries out the fluctuation display of the normal symbol, and a common figure is hit When it is decided, the hit symbol is displayed on the normal symbol display 10 and the symbol is derived and displayed, and when it is decided that the off is decided, the normal symbol display 10
The inset symbol is derived and displayed. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variation time of the normal symbol is 1.0 second, and the symbol determination time for deriving and displaying the hit symbol or the off symbol is 0.2 seconds. . Then, when the winning symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), after the symbol settling time 0.2 seconds has passed, the time 2.6 seconds before the second start winning opening opening processing has passed After that, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 0.2 seconds, and the game ball can win in the second start winning opening 14.

When a game ball is won in the second start winning opening 14 while the variable winning ball device 15 is in the open state, the variable display of the second special symbol is executed, and it is determined to be a small hit. , A small hit symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b. Then, when the small hit symbol is derived and displayed, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the special variable winning ball device 22 is opened for 0.8 seconds, and the gaming ball can win in the special winning opening 24. It becomes.

In the second KT state, unlike the first KT state, the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is extremely short at 0.2 seconds. Moreover, in this embodiment, in the second KT state, at least 3.8 seconds (normal symbol variation time 1.0 second + symbol determination time 0) as an interval period (closing period) after the variable winning ball device 15 is opened. A relatively long period of 2 seconds plus a second start winning opening opening processing time 2.6 seconds) is secured. Therefore, in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 on the upstream side is short and the interval period (closing period)
Since the game ball is long, the gaming ball easily enters the special variable winning prize ball device 22 on the downstream side compared to the first KT state, and the gaming ball easily wins the special winning hole 24.

Further, in the present embodiment, in the second KT state, after the gaming ball passes through the gate 32 in a state in which the variation of the normal symbol is not performed, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state. The variation time of the pattern 1.0 seconds, the pattern determination time 0.2 seconds and the second start winning opening opening pre-processing time 2.
The time after the game ball passes through the gate 32 to reach the variable winning ball device 15 is about 0.6 second while it is after 3.8 seconds which is the total of 6 seconds. It is done. As described above, in the second KT state, it is the time from when the gaming ball passes the gate 32 to when the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, with no variation of the normal symbol being performed,
The variable winning ball device 15 is opened because it is longer than the time it takes the gaming ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after the gaming ball passes through the gate 32 in the state where the variation of the normal symbol is not performed. The game ball reaches the variable winning ball device 15 before being controlled. Therefore, the second K
In the T state, it is difficult for the game ball that has passed the gate 32 in a state in which the variation of the normal symbol is not performed to win the variable winning ball device 15.

In this embodiment, the process of executing the variable display of the normal symbol or controlling the opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU
56) is carried out by executing an ordinary symbol process (see step S26C). The game control microcomputer 560 also executes processing for determining whether or not per common drawing in the normal symbol process processing in step S26C, but depending on whether it is in the KT state or in the normal state. Different probabilities (eg, 1 for KT state
It is determined whether or not per common drawing according to 0/11, or 1/11 in the normal state. Note that
The same probability (for example, whether the gaming state is a probability change state (high probability state) or not, whether it is a non-KT state, a first KT state or a second KT state, or a big hit gaming state , 10% or 100%) may be used to determine whether or not to place a common figure.

In this embodiment, in the first KT state and the second KT state, the variation time of the normal symbol and the symbol determination time are respectively equal to 0.2 seconds, and the time before the second start winning opening opening process is the second. In the 1KT state, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 has been made different by shortening to 0.1 seconds and increasing to 2.6 seconds in the 2nd KT state. I can not. For example, the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning ball device 15 may be made different by changing the fluctuation time and the symbol determination time between the first KT state and the second KT state. Also, for example, the second after closing the variable winning ball device 15
The closed time period of the variable winning ball device 15 (interval period) by configuring the time after the start winning opening opening process to be controllable and making the time after the second starting winning opening opening process different between the first KT state and the second KT state. May be configured to be different. In particular, if the closing period (interval period) of the variable winning prize ball device 15 in the first KT state is shortened by any of the above methods, it is possible to suppress winning in the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. it can.

Further, for example, a special flag (opening extension flag) indicating extension of the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15 is provided, and if the special flag is set, the variable winning as shown in FIG. The first opening pattern (long opening) for opening the ball device 15 for a long time is controlled, and the second winning pattern for opening the variable winning ball device 15 shown in FIG. It may be configured to control by short open). In other words,
The special flag may be set only in the first KT state, and the special flag may be set not to be set in other states including the big hit gaming state.

Further, even in the first KT state, when the last variable display in the low probability / first KT state is to be performed, the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 may be shortened. For example, low probability / 1st KT
The above-mentioned special flag may be deleted according to the 99th stop of the special symbol fluctuation out of the 100 times of the special symbol shortening fluctuation period of the state. With such a configuration, it is possible to suppress giving a sense of discomfort to the player that the variable winning ball device 15 is open for a long time when giving a left hit notification after the end of the low probability / first KT state. be able to.

In addition, as described above, when the variable winning ball device 15 is configured using the open control flag (special flag) of the variable winning ball device 15, further, a flag for shortening the fluctuation display of the special symbol is used. The variation display of the special symbol may be controlled, and in this case, the special flag and the flag for shortening variation may be separately managed to perform control.

Further, the variable winning ball device 15 may be configured to be short-opened during the low probability / non-KT state. With such a configuration, in the case where the open probability of the variable winning ball device 15 is high in the low probability / non-KT state (left-handed state), only a few game balls are operated for shooting. In this case, it is possible to prevent the variable winning ball device 15 from winning, and the low probability / non-KT
It is possible to prevent the right-hand operation from being performed during the state.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the second special symbol variation display with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is stopped changing and there is no normal symbol storage This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and capture aiming at the fluctuation stop timing of the second special symbol becomes possible (when the small hit occurs, the gate 32 when the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long) The variable winning ball device 15 does not open until the game ball which has passed through reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22, and the special winning hole 24
Winning a prize is possible). On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened before the gaming ball passes the gate 32 and reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

FIGS. 16 and 17 are explanatory diagrams showing an example of the contents of the effect control command sent to the effect control microcomputer 200. FIG. In the example shown in FIG.
(H) to 8007 (H), 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) are decorative symbols that are variably displayed on the first variable display portion 9a or the second variable display portion 9b in correspondence to the variable display of the special symbol. It is an effect control command (variation pattern command) which designates a fluctuation pattern. Note that the effect control command for specifying the fluctuation pattern is also a command for specifying the start of fluctuation.
Therefore, the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the command 8000 (H) to 8007.
When one of (H) and 8011 (H) to 8022 (H) is received, the first variable display unit 9 a
Alternatively, control is performed to start variable display of the decorative pattern on the second variable display unit 9b.

The command 9001 (H) is an effect control command (display result 1 designation command) (disappearance designation command) designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the fluctuation pattern command is to be disengaging. The command 9002 (H) is an effect control command (display result 2 designation command (16R probability variation big hit designation command)) which designates that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the variation pattern command is 16R probability variation big hit . Command 9003 (H) displays the display results of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command.
It is an effect control command (display result 3 designation command (6R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that it is to be R probability variation big hit. The command 9004 (H) is an effect control command (display result 4 designation command (6R normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command is 6R normal jackpot . Command 9005 (H) displays the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern specified by the fluctuation pattern command 2
It is an effect control command (display result 5 designation command (2R probability variation big hit designation command)) for designating that the R probability variation big hit is to be made. The command 9006 (H) is an effect control command (display result 6 designation command (2R normal jackpot designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative pattern designated by the fluctuation pattern command is 2R normal jackpot . The command 9007 (H) is an effect control command (display result 7 designation command (small hit designation command)) for designating that the display result of the variable display of the decorative design designated by the change pattern command is a small hit.

Hereinafter, the display result 1 designation command to the display result 7 designation command may be referred to as a display result designation command. In this embodiment, since the game control microcomputer 560 transmits the display result designation command immediately before the change pattern command, the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the display result designation received immediately before the first change pattern command. The command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the first decorative pattern, and the display result specification command received immediately before the second variation pattern command can be determined to be the display result specification command for the second decorative pattern, Although the display result designation command can be shared for the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the display result designation command for the first decorative symbol and the display result designation command for the second decorative symbol may be different.

In addition, instead of transmitting the command for displaying the display result, the game control microcomputer 560 does not transmit the display result designation command, corresponding to each of 15R positive variation big / 6R positive variation big hit / 6R normal big hit / 2R positive variation big hit / 2R normal big hit / small hit / departure The variation pattern command may be determined, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may determine the stop symbol of the decorative pattern based on the received variation pattern command.

The command A000 (H) is an effect control command (a first symbol determination specification command (a first decoration symbol stop specification command)) instructing the stop of the variable display of the first decorative pattern. Command A
001 (H) is an effect control command (second symbol determination specification command (second decoration symbol stop specification command)) instructing the stop of the variable display of the second decoration symbol.

The command BXXX (H) (X = arbitrary hexadecimal number) is an effect control command sent from the start of the big hit game to the end of the big hit game. Among them, B000 (H) is an effect control command (first jackpot start designation command: first fanfare designation command) for specifying the start of the first jackpot game. B 001 (H) is an effect control command (first big hit end designation command: first ending designation command) for specifying the end of the first big hit game. B 002 (H) is an effect control command (second jackpot start designation command: second fanfare designation command) for specifying the start of the second jackpot game. B003 (H) is an effect control command (second big hit end designation command: second ending designation command) for specifying the end of the second big hit game. B 004 (H) is an effect control command (small hit start designation command) for specifying the start of the small hit game. B 005 (H) is an effect control command (small hit end designation command) for specifying the end of the small hit game.

The command B1XX (H) is an effect control command (display command during large winning opening open) for designating a display in a round in the big hit game. In addition, the number of rounds displayed on "XX" is set. The command B2XX (H) is an effect control command (display command after opening of the big winning opening) for designating display (display of interval between rounds) after round in the big hit game.

The command B 400 (H) is an effect control command (big winning opening winning combination designation command) for designating that the gaming ball has won a winning combination in the big winning opening. The command B 401 (H) is an effect control command (special winning opening winning designation command) for specifying that the gaming ball has won a special winning opening.

Command C 000 (H) is an effect control command (first valid start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won in the first start winning opening 13 in a state where the first reserved memory number has not reached 4
It is. The command C 001 (H) is an effect control command (second valid start winning designation command) indicating that the game ball has won in the second start winning opening 14 in a state where the second reserved storage number has not reached four. A command indicating the first pending storage number may be transmitted as a first valid start winning designation command, and a command indicating the second pending storage number may be transmitted as a second valid startup winning designation command. Then, the first valid start winning combination designation command and the second valid start winning combination designation command are commands indicating that there is a start winning combination.

Command D000 (H) is waiting for the first customer (the first special symbol has not been changed,
This is an effect control command (first customer waiting demo display specification command) that specifies that the first pending storage is not stored). Command D 001 (H) is in the second customer waiting state (second
It is an effect control command (second customer waiting demonstration display designation command) for designating that the variation of the special symbol is not performed and the second holding storage is not stored). The first customer waiting demo display specification command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the normal state. In addition, the second customer waiting demo display specification command may be a command that can be transmitted only in the KT state.

The command E000 (H) is an effect control command (low probability / non-KT background designation command) for designating background display when the gaming state is the low probability / non-KT state. Command E 001 (
H) is an effect control command (low probability / first KT background designation command) for specifying background display when the gaming state is the low probability / first KT state. Command E 002 (H) is an effect control command for specifying background display when the gaming state is high probability / first KT state (high probability / first number
KT background specification command). Command E 003 (H) has a high probability of playing state / 2K
It is an effect control command (high probability / second KT background designation command) for specifying background display when in the T state.

The effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, the effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control substrate 80 receives the effect control command described above from the game control microcomputer 560 mounted on the main substrate 31. Then, according to the contents shown in FIGS. 16 and 17, the display states of the first variable display 9a and the second variable display 9b and the display state of the background symbol display 9c are changed, and the display state of the lamp is changed. Sound number data is output to the sound output board 70. Note that effect control commands other than the effect control commands shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are also transmitted from the main substrate 31 to the effect control substrate 80. For example, a more detailed effect control command related to a big hit game and a effect control command indicating a game state (for example, a effect control command indicating an initialization command) are also transmitted from the main board 31 to the effect control board 80.

FIG. 18 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of the first special symbol process processing (step S26A) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the first special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the first special symbol display 8a and the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is executed.

When the CPU 56 performs the first special symbol process processing, the first one provided on the game board 6
If the first starting opening switch 13a for detecting that the gaming ball has won in the starting winning opening 13 is on, that is, if there is a starting winning that the gaming ball wins in the first starting winning opening 13 (step S311), execute the first start port switch passing process (step S312)
. Thereafter, the CPU 56 performs one of the processes in steps S300 to S307 in accordance with the internal state (specifically, the value of the first special symbol process flag).

  The process of steps S300 to S307 is the following process.

First special symbol normal processing (step S300): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is to be a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the first big hit flag is set. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S301. The first big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over.

First variation pattern setting process (step S301): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S302.

First display result specification command transmission process (step S302): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S303.

Processing during the first special symbol variation (step S303): the value of the first special symbol process flag is 3
Is executed when When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the first fluctuation pattern setting process has elapsed (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S301 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol determination specification command is performed, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Incidentally, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the symbol determination designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol.

First special symbol stop processing (step S304): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 4. When the first jackpot flag is set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S304A. If the first jackpot flag is not set, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300. In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. Data is set to the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting, step S22
In the display control process, the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

First gate passage waiting process (step S304A): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 8. In the first gate passage waiting process, control to wait for passage of the gaming ball to the operation gate 17 is performed. When passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305.

First big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S305): the value of the first special symbol process flag is 5
Is executed when In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, control to open the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of gaming balls having entered the special variable winning prize ball device 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the first large winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S306. In addition, although the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is executed for each round,
When starting the first round, the first big winning opening opening pre-processing is also processing to start the big hit game.

First big winning opening open process (step S306): the value of the first special symbol process flag is 6
Is executed when Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 200 for effect control, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning prize ball device 20 and the like are performed. Further, when the gaming ball is won in the special winning opening and the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to the value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S305. Do. Also, when all the rounds are finished, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S307.

First big hit end processing (step S307): executed when the value of the first special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, a second KT flag). Then, the internal state (first special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing the starting opening switch passing process of step S312.
In the starting opening switch passing process, the CPU 56 first determines whether the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value (specifically, the value of the first pending storage number counter for counting the first number of pending storages) Checks whether or not 4) (step S212). If the first number of pending storages has reached the upper limit value, the first start port switch passage process is ended as it is.

If the first pending storage number has not reached the upper limit value, the CPU 56 increases the value of the first pending storage number counter by 1 (step S213) and the value of the total pending storage number counter for counting the total pending storage number Is increased by 1 (step S214). Then, the CPU 56 extracts values from the random number circuit 503 and a counter for generating software random numbers,
A process of storing in the storage area in the first storage buffer (see FIG. 20) is executed (step S215). In the process of step S215, the big hit determination random number (random 1), the big hit type determination random number (random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) which are software random numbers are extracted and stored in the storage area . In addition, it does not extract the random number for fluctuation pattern judgment (random 5) in the 1st starting opening switch passage processing (at the time of starting winning combination) and store in advance in the preservation area, it extracts at the time of the fluctuation start of the first special symbol You may do so. For example, in the first variation pattern setting process described later, the game control microcomputer 560 directly extracts a value from the variation pattern determination random number counter for generating a variation pattern determination random number (random 5). May be

FIG. 20 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of an area (pending storage buffer) for saving random numbers and the like corresponding to the pending storage. As shown in FIG. 20, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the first number of pending storages is secured in the first pending storage buffer. In the second hold storage buffer, a storage area corresponding to the upper limit (4 in this example) of the second hold storage number is secured. In this embodiment, the first hold storage buffer and the second hold storage buffer store a jackpot determination random number (random 1), a jackpot type determination random number (random 2), and a fluctuation pattern determination random number (random 5). Be done. The first holding storage buffer and the second holding storage buffer are formed in the RAM 55.

And further, the microcomputer 200 for effect control of the first effective start winning command
Control to be sent to the client (step S216). The first valid start winning command includes a result of the prior determination.

FIG. 21 shows the first special symbol normal processing in the first special symbol process processing (step S30
Fig. 6 is a flowchart showing 0). The state where the first special symbol normal processing is executed is the case where the value of the first special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S300. In addition, when the value of the first special symbol process flag is the value indicating step S300, the first
In the special symbol display 8a, the first special symbol is not variably displayed, and it is not in the first jackpot game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times).

In the first special symbol normal processing, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the first number of pending storages (step S52A). Specifically, the count value of the first pending storage number counter is confirmed.

If the first number of pending storages is 0, a first customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51A).

If the first number of pending storages is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 does not have the RAM 5.
The random number values stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number 1 in the first pending storage number buffer 5 are read out and stored in the first random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53A). The value of the number is decremented by 1 (the count value of the first pending storage number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54A). That is, R
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the first pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the first pending storage number buffer of AM 55 is set to the first pending storage number = n−1 Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to each first reserved storage number is extracted always matches the order of the first reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to be. That is, in this example, the contents of the storage areas are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified. In this example, each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the first number of pending storages, and each random number value stored in each storage area corresponding to the second number of pending storages The extracted order is also stored so as to be identifiable.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60A). Specifically, when the probability change flag, the first KT flag, and the second KT flag are off, it is determined that the low probability / non KT state is set, and the low probability / non KT background designation command is determined. If the 1 KT flag is on, it is determined that the state is low probability / first KT state, and low probability / # 1 K
It is determined that the T background specification command is high probability / first KT state when the probability change flag is on and the first KT flag is on, and the high probability / first KT background specification command is determined, and the probability change flag is on the second KT If the flag is on, it is determined that the state is high probability / second KT state, and a high probability / second KT background designation command is transmitted.

Next, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the second special symbol is in progress (step S64AA). Concretely, when the 2nd big hit flag which shows that it becomes big hit on the basis of the fluctuation indicator of 2nd special symbol is set, it decides that it is under big hit fluctuation of the 2nd special symbol. If it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed, the process proceeds to step S68A without performing the process after step S64A. Thereby, when the variation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the second special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly separated regardless of whether the big hit determination value is stored or not.

In addition, about the method of making it forcibly remove | deviate, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, when the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed in step S64AA, the random number value (fixed value) of outlier is set as the big hit determination random number (random 1), and the process proceeds to step S65A. It may be forcibly removed regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the start winning combination.

In addition, in the gaming machine which performs the small hit judgment to decide whether or not to make the small hit separately from the big hit judgment, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol at step S64AA, the steps S64A to S161A. Set a random number value (fixed value) out of phase as a small hit judgment random number (a random number common to the big hit judgment random number may be used or a completely different random number) without performing the process of By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the start winning combination.

If it is not during the big hit change of the second special symbol, microcomputer 560 for game control
Reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1) from the first random number storage buffer (step S
64A), the big hit determination module is executed (step S65A). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that the jackpot determination random number is determined to be a jackpot if it matches the predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S66A), the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets a first big hit flag indicating that a big hit will be based on the variable display of the first special symbol (step S67A) .
Then, based on random 2, it is determined whether the big hit type is 16R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, or 6R normal big hit (step S160A), the big hit type is stored (step S161A), and the process proceeds to step S68A . In addition, when it is determined that the big hit is not made in step S66A (that is, the case where it is determined to be lost), the process proceeds to step S68A.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a case where it is determined to be all off unconditionally is shown, but such a mode is the key. I can not. For example, even when the display result of the variable display of the first special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to be determined as a small hit with a low probability.

Then, in step S68A, the value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first variation pattern setting process (step S68A). Although illustration is omitted,
The symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S68A.

In step S65A, in consideration of the gaming state, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made using any of the non-probable change time jackpot determination table and the positive change time jackpot determination table.

FIG. 22 shows the first variation pattern setting process in the first special symbol process process (step S
Fig. 302 is a flow chart showing the process of In the first variation pattern setting process, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first selects one of the variation pattern tables shown in FIGS. 12A to 12B according to the gaming state. Do (step S20
1). Next, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is based on the variation pattern table decided to be used in step S201 and the variation pattern determination random number (random 5) stored in the first special symbol determination buffer. Then, it is determined which of the fluctuation patterns shown in FIG. 12 (step S1700). In this example, the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is determined by determining the fluctuation pattern. Further, after the fluctuation time is determined, the fluctuation pattern in which the determined fluctuation time is set may be selected from among a plurality of fluctuation patterns.

When the variation pattern is determined, the game control microcomputer 560 performs control to transmit a variation pattern command indicating the determined variation pattern to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1701).

In addition, when the fluctuation time (variation pattern) of the first special symbol is determined in step S1700, microcomputer 560 for game control sets fluctuation time data indicating the determined fluctuation time in the first special symbol process timer and fluctuates. Start measuring time (step S
1702) A measurement execution flag to be described later is set, and variable display of the first special symbol on the first special symbol display 8a is started (step S1703). Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first display result designation command transmission process (step S1706).

In the first display result specification command transmission process (step S302), the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines whether or not to make a big hit, and based on the big hit type determination result. Control is performed to transmit one of the display result designation commands (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) to the effect control microcomputer 200.

FIG. 23 shows the process during the first special symbol variation in the first special symbol process processing (step S3
Fig. 13 is a flow chart showing 03). During the first special symbol change processing, the CPU 56
First, the first variation time timer is decremented by 1 (step S1121A), and when the first variation time timer times out (step S1122A), the effect control microcomputer 200
Control to transmit the symbol determination specification command to the (step S1123A). And CP
U56 stops the value of the first special symbol process flag the first special symbol stop processing (step S304
It updates to the value corresponding to) (step S1124A).

If the first variation time timer has not timed out, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S1125A
). In addition, whether the value of the second special symbol process flag is the value corresponding to the second special symbol stop processing is, for example, whether or not the big hit symbol is derived and displayed in the second special symbol display 8b. It can be determined by confirming whether or not the second jackpot flag indicating that a big hit will be made based on the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. If the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b, the CPU 56 proceeds to step S1123A and performs control to transmit the symbol determination designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1123A). The value of the first special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the first special symbol stop process (step S304) (step S1124A).

By performing the processing of steps S1125A to S1125A, in this embodiment, if the variation display of the second special symbol during the execution of the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit,
The variable display of the first special symbol is forcibly stopped so that a big hit does not occur at the same time with the first special symbol and the second special symbol. In this case, when the variable display of the first special symbol is forced off on the side of the effect control microcomputer 200, the first variable display portion 9a in the first variable display portion 9a is received based on the reception of the symbol determination designation command. (1) The stop display of the decorative symbol is stopped, and based on the display result 1 designation command transmitted in step S302, control is performed to forcibly stop the off-set symbol as the variable display result of the first decorative symbol.

In this embodiment, in the first special symbol process process shown in FIG. 18 and the second special symbol process process shown in FIG. 28, first timer opening switch passage process (see step S312) for each timer interrupt. And second start port switch passage processing (step S32
Since 2) is executed, even if the stop display of the big hit symbol of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is configured, it is configured to store a new reserved memory when a new start winning combination occurs It is done.

Unless the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the second special symbol display 8b (step S112)
N of 5A, the process ends as it is.

FIG. 24 is a flowchart showing the first special symbol stop process. In the first special symbol stop processing, first, the CPU 56 determines whether the value of the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of low probability / first KT state is “0” (step S2010), “0” If there is a case, that is, if it is not in the low probability / first KT state, the process proceeds to step S2014. If the value of the KT number counter is not "0", that is, if it is in the low probability / first KT state, the CPU 56
The value of the KT number counter is decremented by 1 (step S2011), and it is determined whether the value has become 0 (step S2012). If the value of the KT counter does not become "0",
It transfers to step S2014. When the value of the KT number counter becomes “0”, that is, when the 100th change of the low probability / first KT state ends, the CPU 56 resets the first KT flag indicating that the first KT state is Step S2013), Step S2
Move to 014. As a result, the first KT state ends (transition to the low probability / non-KT state) when 100 times of variation ends in the low probability / first KT state.

In step S2014, the CPU 56 determines whether the first jackpot flag is set (step S2014). If the first jackpot flag is set, then C
If the PU 56 is set, the positive change flag, the first KT flag, the second KT flag, KT
The number counter is reset (step S2015).

Then, if the CPU 56 has not been output yet, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2
Control to start external output (see FIGS. 32 and 33) (step S2015 X)
.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the big winning opening opening pre-timer (step S2017), sets the opening pattern data for round 1 according to the big hit type (step S2018), and sets the round number counter indicating the number of rounds for the big hit. "" (Step S2019)
, Set the value of the first special symbol process flag to the value corresponding to the first gate passage waiting process (
Step S2020).

In this embodiment, by executing the processing of step S2015X, the external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is even before the game ball passes through the operation gate 17 and the big hit game is started The external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is started at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed.

Although details will be described later, when the stop display of the jackpot symbol is displayed, it is possible to execute a right-hit notification to prompt the player to fire the game ball to the right of the game area 7 . In addition, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, it is possible to execute a launch promotion notification for prompting the player to aim the operation gate 17 to launch the game ball as a right-handed notification.

Also, conversely, when passing of the game ball at the gate 32 or the actuation gate 17 is detected in the normal state (low probability / non KT state), an aspect with a low recognition degree (for example, small volume sound output or small By the screen display), the player may be configured to perform a left strike notification to urge the player to fire the game ball to the left of the game area 7. On the other hand, in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), when a game ball to the second start winning opening 14 or the special winning opening 24 is detected, an aspect with a high degree of recognition (for example, a loud sound) The left hit notification may be performed by output or large screen display). With such a configuration, the emission notification can be accurately performed. In particular, with the above configuration, for the player who has operated the game ball accidentally to the right of the game area 7, a slight left-handed notification is given by an aspect in which the recognition degree to the periphery of the game machine is low. Then, for the player who intentionally performs the right hitting operation, the left hitting notification may be performed in a mode in which the degree of recognition around the gaming machine is high. With such a configuration, it is possible to urge the player who intentionally performs the right strike operation to return from the store clerk of the game arcade to the left strike operation.

Further, in the above case, when the number of detected game balls at the gate 32, the operation gate 17, the second start winning opening 14, and the special winning opening 24 reaches a predetermined number, the left hitting notification is performed It is also good. In addition, when the game ball is detected a plurality of times (for example, 5 times) within a predetermined period (for example, 1 minute) in the gate 32 and the operation gate 17, the left strike notification is performed, and the second start winning opening 14 or the special winning opening In the case of a predetermined number (e.g., 1) or more of the game balls detected at 24, the game may be configured to give a left hit notification.

In addition, for example, while detection of the game ball with gate 32 and operation gate 17 does not output the external signal, detection of the game ball with 2nd starting winning a prize opening 14 and special winning a prize opening 24 the output of the external signal It may be configured to perform.

In the present embodiment, the demonstration display is performed when a specific condition is satisfied.
If demonstration of the game ball to the gate 32, operation gate 17, second start winning opening 14 or special winning opening 24 is detected while demonstration display is being performed in the normal state, execution of demonstration display being executed And may issue a left hit notification.

In this embodiment, since the external output of the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2 is executed at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed, for example, low probability / first before the game store is closed.
If the pending memory of the second special symbol remains after ending the KT state, the second special symbol may not be displayed for a long time in such a situation that the player has ended the game with the end of the business of the game store 5
Since it is possible to externally output when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed through the variable display of the minute), the store clerk of the game shop is urged to initialize the gaming machine 1 from the closing of the game shop to the next opening. it can.
At this time, the store clerk is to open the store after performing initialization (RAM clear).

Moreover, not only before the game store is closed, but when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed after the player leaves the seat (for example, the second hold memory generated in the KT state is digested in the normal state, the second special There is a big hit (when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed) after a long time (5 minutes) of the variable display of the symbol), but also in such a case the big hit 1 and the big hit 2 at the timing when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed
Since the external output is executed, it is possible to urge the store clerk of the game arcade to initialize the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 25 shows the first gate passage waiting process in the special symbol process process (step S304)
It is a flowchart which shows A). In the first gate passage waiting process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input (step S250).
1). If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is not input, the process is ended as it is. If the detection signal from the operation gate switch 17a is input, the CPU 56
The first jackpot start designation command is transmitted (step S2502), and the value of the first special symbol process flag is set to a value corresponding to the first big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S2503).

In this embodiment, the big gate game is not started immediately when the big hit symbol is derived and displayed as a result of the variable display of the first special symbol by the execution of the first gate passage waiting process, and the operation gate 17 The game ball is configured to shift to the big hit game on the condition that the game ball passes and is detected by the operation gate switch 17a.

FIG. 26 shows the first big winning opening opening pre-processing in the special symbol process processing (step S305
) Is a flowchart showing FIG. In the first big winning opening opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the big winning opening pre-opening timer by 1 (step S1401). In addition, if it is before the start of round 1, by executing the process of step S1401, the value of the special winning opening pre-opening timer set in step S2017 of the first special symbol stop process is measured. , The big hit display time (fanfare period) before the start of round 1 will be measured. Also, if it is round 1 or later, the value of the big winning opening pre-opening timer set in the big winning opening open processing is measured by executing the processing of step S1401 after each round ( The interval period of the final round will be measured.

In this embodiment, the big hit display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are measured using a common time measurement timer, but the big hit display time (fanfare period) and the interval period are separately set. The timer may be used to measure time.

Next, when the special winning opening open timer has timed out (the value of the time measuring timer is 0) (step S1411), the CPU 56 executes the special winning opening opening specification command EX.
The current number of rounds is set in T data, and control is performed to transmit to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S1412).

Next, the CPU 56 initializes a winning number counter for counting the number of winnings of the gaming ball at the special winning opening (step S1413). That is, the value of the winning number counter is set to 0.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the special winning opening to an open state (step S1414). Specifically, the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special variable winning prize ball device 20.

Next, the CPU 56 sets the opening time according to the big hit type and the round to be started to the opening time timer for measuring the opening time of the big winning opening (step S1415).

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the special winning opening open process (step S306) (step S1416).

FIG. 27 is a flowchart showing the first jackpot end process (step S307) in the special symbol process process. In the first big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200A), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204A. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the first big hit flag is reset (step S2201A)
, And control to transmit a first jackpot end designation command (step S2202A). Then, in the big hit end display timer, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set (step S2203)
A), finish the process.

In step S2204A, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S22).
04A). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0,
That is, it is checked whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205A). If it has not, the process is ended.

If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205A), the CPU 56
Check whether the type of the big hit finished this time is 16R probability variation big hit (step S22)
06A). In addition, it can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag indicating that it is a probability variation status, and shifts to a probability variation status (high probability status) (step S2207A) and a second KT flag that indicates a second KT status Is set to shift to the second KT state (step S2208A)
. Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of the big hit ended this time is the 6R probability variation big hit (step S2209A). In addition, it can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161A of the first special symbol normal processing whether or not it is a 6R probability variation big hit. If it is a 6R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2210A) and the 1st K
A first KT flag indicating that it is in the T state is set to shift to the first KT state (step S2211A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

If it is not 6R probability variation big hit (ie, if it is 6R normal big hit), CPU56,
The first KT flag is set to shift to the first KT state (step S2212A). Also,
The CPU 56 sets “100” to the KT number counter indicating the remaining number of low probability / first KT state (step S2213A). Then, the process proceeds to step S2214A.

Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the first special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the first special symbol normal processing (step S300) (step S2214A).

FIG. 28 is a flow chart showing an example of a program of the second special symbol process processing (step S26B) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. As described above, in the second special symbol process processing, processing for controlling the second special symbol display 8b, the special variable winning ball device 20, and the special variable winning ball device 22 is executed.

The CPU 56 is provided on the game board 6 when performing the second special symbol process processing.
If the second start opening switch 14a for detecting that the game ball has won in the start winning opening 14 is on, that is, if there is a start winning that the game ball wins in the second start winning opening 14 (step S321), execute the second start port switch passing process (step S322)
. If the “first” of the first starting port switch passing process shown in FIG. 19 is read as the “second”, the second starting port switch passing process will be described. Thereafter, the CPU 56 executes steps S350 to S according to the internal state (specifically, the value of the second special symbol process flag).
Perform any of 360 processing.

  The processes of steps S350 to S360 are the following processes.

Second special symbol normal processing (step S350): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 0. When the variable display of the special symbol can be started, the game control microcomputer 560 confirms the number of stored numerical data (total number of held memories) stored in the number of held memories buffer. The storage number of the numerical data stored in the pending storage number buffer can be confirmed by the count value of the total pending storage number counter. Also, if the count value of the combined holding memory number counter is not 0, it is determined whether or not the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is to be a big hit. In the case of a big hit, the second big hit flag is set. On the other hand, the small hit flag is set when not making a big hit. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (1 in this example) according to step S351. The second big hit flag is reset when the big hit game is over. The small hit flag is reset when the small hit game is over.

Second variation pattern setting process (step S351): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 1. Also, the fluctuation pattern is determined, and the fluctuation time in the fluctuation pattern (variable display time: time from the start of variable display to the derivation display (stop display) of the display result) is the fluctuation time of the variable display of the special symbol Decide to do. Also, start the fluctuation time timer that measures the fluctuation time of the special symbol. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (2 in this example) corresponding to step S352.

Second display result specification command transmission process (step S352): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 2. Control for transmitting a display result designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed. Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (3 in this example) corresponding to step S353.

Second special symbol during processing (step S353): the value of the second special symbol process flag is 3
Is executed when When the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern selected in the second fluctuation pattern setting processing elapses (when the fluctuation time timer set in step S351 times out, ie, the value of the fluctuation time timer becomes 0), the effect control microcomputer 200 Control to transmit the symbol determination specification command is performed, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (4 in this example) corresponding to step S304. Incidentally, when the effect control microcomputer 200 receives the symbol determination designation command transmitted by the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control microcomputer 200 controls the effect display device 9 to stop the decorative symbol.

Second special symbol stop processing (step S354): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is four. When the second jackpot flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (11 in this example) corresponding to step S354A. If the small hit flag is set, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (8 in this example) corresponding to step S358. When neither the second big hit flag nor the small hit flag is set (when forced off), the internal state (second special symbol process flag) the value corresponding to step S 350 (0 in this example)
Update to In this embodiment, the special symbol display control for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol in the special symbol display control process, as will be described later, based on the value of the special symbol process flag being 4 will be described later. The data is set in the output buffer for special symbol display control data setting, and the stop symbol of the special symbol is actually stopped and displayed in the display control process of step S22 according to the setting contents of the output buffer.

Second gate passage waiting process (step S354A): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 11. In the second gate passage waiting process, control is performed to wait for passage of the gaming ball to the operation gate 17. The internal state (second special symbol process flag) is a value corresponding to step S 355 (5 in this example) when passage of the game ball to the operation gate 17 is detected.
Update to

Second big winning opening opening pre-processing (step S355): the value of the second special symbol process flag is 5
Is executed when In the second big winning opening opening pre-processing, control to open the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of gaming balls having entered the special variable winning prize ball device 20) is initialized, and the solenoid 21 is driven to open the special winning opening. Further, the execution time of the second large winning opening open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (6 in this example) corresponding to step S356. In addition, although the second big winning a prize opening opening processing is executed every each round,
When starting the first round, the second big winning opening opening pre-processing is also a processing to start the big hit game.

Second large winning opening opening process (step S356): the value of the second special symbol process flag is 6
Is executed when Control for transmitting the effect control command of round display in the big hit gaming state to the microcomputer 200 for effect control, processing for confirming the establishment of the closing condition of the special variable winning prize ball device 20 and the like are performed. Further, when the gaming ball is won in the special winning opening and the gaming ball is detected by the first count switch 23a, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening winning designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition of the special variable winning prize ball device 20 is satisfied and there are still remaining rounds, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (5 in this example) corresponding to step S355. Do. Also, when all the rounds are finished, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (7 in this example) corresponding to step S357.

Second big hit end processing (step S357): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 7. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform display control to notify the player that the big hit gaming state has ended. Further, processing is performed to set a flag indicating the gaming state (for example, a probability change flag, a first KT flag, a second KT flag). Then, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

Second small hit opening pre-processing (step S358): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 8. In the second small hit opening pre-processing, control to open the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is performed. Specifically, a counter (for example, a counter for counting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 24) is initialized, and the solenoid 106 is driven to open the special variable winning ball device 22. Further, the execution time of the second small hit open processing is set by the timer, and the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (9 in this example) corresponding to step S359. The second small hit opening pre-processing is also a process to start a small hit game.

Second small hit open processing (step S359): is executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is nine. A process or the like is performed to confirm that the closing condition of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is satisfied. In this embodiment, the closing condition is satisfied when the opening time of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is 0.8 seconds (see FIG. 15). Further, when the game ball is won in the special winning opening and the game ball is detected by the second count switch 25a, control is performed to transmit a special winning opening prize designation command to the effect control microcomputer 200. If the closing condition is satisfied, the internal state (second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (10 (decimal) in this example) corresponding to step S360.

Second small hit end processing (step S360): executed when the value of the second special symbol process flag is 10. Control is performed to cause the effect control microcomputer 200 to perform display control to notify the player that the small hit gaming state has ended. And the internal state (
The second special symbol process flag) is updated to a value (0 in this example) corresponding to step S300.

FIG. 29 shows the second special symbol normal processing in the second special symbol process processing (step S35
Fig. 6 is a flowchart showing 0). The state where the second special symbol normal processing is executed is a case where the value of the second special symbol process flag is a value indicating step S350. In addition, when the value of the second special symbol process flag has become a value indicating step S350, the second
In the state that the variable display of the second special symbol is not made in the special symbol display 8b, and during the second big hit game (the special variable winning ball device 20 is opened a predetermined number of times) during the small hit game (special variable winning ball) In the case where the device 22 is not open).

In the second special symbol normal processing, the gaming control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) first confirms the value of the second reserved storage number (step S52B). Specifically, the count value of the second pending storage number counter is confirmed.

If the second pending storage number is 0, a second customer waiting demonstration display designation command is transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S51B).

If the second number of pending storages is not 0, the game control microcomputer 560 does not have the RAM 5.
The random number values stored in the storage area corresponding to the pending storage number 1 in the second pending storage number buffer 5 are read out and stored in the second random number buffer area of the RAM 55 (step S53B), and the second pending storage The value of the number is decreased by 1 (the count value of the second reserved memory number counter is decremented by 1), and the contents of each storage area are shifted (step S54B). That is, R
Each random number value stored in the storage area corresponding to the second pending storage number = n (n = 2, 3, 4) in the second pending storage number buffer of AM 55 is set to the second pending storage number = n−1 Store in the corresponding storage area. Therefore, the order in which the random number values stored in the respective storage areas corresponding to the respective second reserved storage numbers are extracted always matches the order of the second reserved storage number = 1, 2, 3, 4 It is supposed to be. That is, in this example, the contents of the storage areas are shifted each time the variable display start condition is satisfied. Therefore, the order in which the random number values are extracted can be specified.

Thereafter, the game control microcomputer 560 transmits a background designation command corresponding to the current game state to the effect control microcomputer 200 (step S60B). In addition, how to send a specific background designation command is the step S60A of the first special symbol normal processing.
It is the same as the process shown in.

Next, the gaming control microcomputer 560 determines whether or not the jackpot variation of the first special symbol is in progress (step S64BB). Specifically, when the first big hit flag indicating that a big hit is to be made is set based on the variable display of the first special symbol, it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed. When it is determined that the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed, the process proceeds to step S68B without performing the process after step S64B. Thereby, when the variation of the second special symbol is started during the big hit variation of the first special symbol, it is configured to be forcibly separated regardless of whether or not the big hit determination value is stored.

In addition, about the method of making it forcibly remove | deviate, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above. For example, when the big hit of the first special symbol is being changed in step S64BB, the random number value (fixed value) of outlier is set as the big hit determination random number (random 1), and the process proceeds to step S65B. It may be forcibly removed regardless of which jackpot determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the start winning combination.

In addition, in the gaming machine which performs the small hit judgment to decide whether or not to make the small hit separately from the big hit judgment, when the big hit fluctuation of the first special symbol in step S64BB, the steps S64B to S161B. Set a random number value (fixed value) out of phase as a small hit judgment random number (a random number common to the big hit judgment random number may be used or a completely different random number) without performing the process of By performing the small hit determination, it may be forcibly removed regardless of which big hit determination random number (random 1) was acquired at the start winning combination.

If it is not during the big hit of the first special symbol microcomputer 560 for game control
Reads the jackpot determination random number (random 1) from the second random number storage buffer (step S
64B), the big hit determination module is executed (step S65B). The jackpot determination module is a program that determines that the jackpot determination random number is determined to be a jackpot if it matches the predetermined jackpot determination value. If it is determined to be a big hit (step S66B), the gaming control microcomputer 560 sets a second big hit flag indicating that it will be a big hit based on the variable display of the second special symbol (step S67B) .
And, according to random 2 big hit classification 16R probability variation big hit, 6R probability variation big hit, 2R
Determine whether it is a definite variation big hit or a 2R normal big hit (step S160B),
The jackpot type is stored (step S161B), and the process proceeds to step S68B.

Further, when not making a big hit in step S66B, the game control microcomputer 56 sets a small hit flag indicating that the small hit will be made (step S164B)
Decide to be a small hit as it is. Then, the process proceeds to step S68B.

In addition, in this embodiment, when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, a case where it is determined to be all small hits unconditionally is shown (forced to be a gap) The case is not limited to such an aspect). For example, even when the display result of the variable display of the second special symbol is not determined to be a big hit, it may be configured to perform lottery processing based on random numbers to determine whether to make a small hit or not. In this case, although the lottery process is performed, 100
It may be configured to determine a small hit with a probability of%, or may be configured to be determined as a shift with a low probability.

Then, in step S68B, the value of the second special symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the second variation pattern setting process (step S68B). Although illustration is omitted,
The symbol to be stopped is determined immediately before step S68B.

In step S65B, in consideration of the gaming state, it is determined whether or not a big hit is to be made using any of the non-probable change time jackpot determination table and the positive change time jackpot determination table.

The second variation pattern setting process (step S351) is the same as the first variation pattern setting process (step S301) shown in FIG. That is, in the first variation pattern setting process shown in FIG. 22, the second variation pattern process has been described if “first” is replaced with “second”.

In the second display result designation command transmission process (step S352), the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) determines the result of the determination of the big hit or the small hit, and the determination result of the big hit type. Based on the display result specification command (display result 1 specification command ~ display result 3 specification command, display result 5 specification command ~ display result 7)
Control is performed to transmit the designated command to the effect control microcomputer 200.

The second special symbol changing process (step S353) is similar to the first special symbol changing process (step S303) shown in FIG. That is, in the first special symbol variation processing shown in FIG. 23, the second special symbol variation processing has been described if “first” is replaced with “second”.

The second gate passage waiting process (step S354A) is the same as the first gate passage waiting process (step S304A) shown in FIG. That is, in the first gate passage waiting process shown in FIG. 25, the second gate passage waiting process has been described if “first” is read as “second”.

The second large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S355) is the same as the first large winning opening opening pre-processing (step S304A) shown in FIG. That is, if "first" is read as "second" in the first large winning opening opening pre-processing shown in FIG. 26, the second large winning opening opening pre-processing will be described.

FIG. 30 is a flowchart showing the second jackpot end process (step S357) in the special symbol process process. In the second big hit end process, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the big hit end display timer is set (step S2200B), and when the big hit end display timer is set, the process proceeds to step S2204B. If the big hit end display timer is not set, the second big hit flag is reset (step S2201 B)
, And control to transmit a second jackpot end designation command (step S2202B). Then, in the big hit end display timer, a value corresponding to the display time corresponding to the time when the big hit end display is performed in the effect display device 9 (big hit end display time) is set (step S2203)
B), end the process.

In step S2204B, the value of the big hit end display timer is decremented by 1 (step S22).
04 B). Then, the CPU 56 determines whether the value of the big hit end display timer is 0,
That is, it is checked whether the big hit end display time has elapsed (step S2205B). If it has not, the process is ended.

If the big hit end display time has elapsed (Y in step S2205B), the CPU 56
Check whether the type of the big hit finished this time is 16R probability variation big hit (step S22)
06B). In addition, it can be determined by, for example, confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing whether or not the 16R probability variation big hit. If the 16R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2207B). Next, the CPU 56 confirms whether or not the control was made to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the current big hit (step S220).
8B). In addition, whether or not it was controlled to the first KT state or the second KT state before starting the big hit, for example, in the second special symbol stop processing before starting the big hit game, it is the first KT state before the big hit start The first KT memory flag indicating that the second KT state has been set, and the second KT memory flag indicating that the second KT state has been set are set.
It may be checked whether the T memory flag or the second KT memory flag is set. If it is not the first KT state or the second KT state before the big hit starts, the first KT state
The flag is set to shift to the first KT state (step S2209B). If it is in the 1st KT state or the 2nd KT state before the big hit start, the 2nd KT flag is set and 2K
It shifts to the T state (step S2210B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

In this embodiment, when the process of steps S2208B to S2210B is performed, in this embodiment, if it becomes a 16R probability variation big hit based on the variation display of the second special symbol, if it is in the KT state before the big hit start. It is configured to shift to the second KT state only, and to shift to the first KT state when it is in the non-KT state before the start of the big hit. That is,
As described above, in this embodiment, in the non-KT state (low probability / non-KT state), the left-hand operation is configured to be performed, and the variable display of the first special symbol is mainly performed It is constructed assuming. However, if it has been configured to be unconditionally transitioned to the second KT state when the 16R probability variation big hit occurs due to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol, the right-handed operation is performed by daringly even in the non-KT state It becomes possible to shift to the 2 KT state, and there is a risk that the original gameplay is lost and the irritability is unnecessarily increased. So, in this embodiment, when it comes to the 16R certainty variation big hit based on the fluctuation indication of the 2nd special symbol, it moves to the 2nd KT state only when it is KT state before the big hit start, Such a situation is prevented, and in the non-KT state, the player is urged to perform a left-hand operation.

If it is not the 16R definite variation big hit, the CPU 56 confirms whether the type of the big hit ended this time is the 6R positive variation big hit or the 2R positive variation big hit (step S2211B). 6
Whether it is R definite variation big hit or 2R definite variation big hit can be determined, for example, by confirming the jackpot type stored in step S161B of the second special symbol normal processing. If it is a 6R probability variation big hit or a 2R probability variation big hit, the CPU 56 sets a probability variation flag and shifts to a probability variation state (high probability state) (step S2212B), sets a first KT flag and shifts to a first KT state ( Step S2213B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

If neither the 6R probability variation big hit nor the 2R probability variation big hit (i.e., 2R normal big hit), the CPU 56 sets the first KT flag and shifts to the first KT state (step S2214B). In addition, the CPU 56 sets “100” to the KT number counter (step S2215B). Then, the process proceeds to step S2216B.

Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the second special symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the second special symbol normal processing (step S350) (step S2216B).

FIG. 31 is a flow chart showing an example of a program for the special symbol display control process (step S32) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 (specifically, the CPU 56) mounted on the main substrate 31. In the special symbol display control process, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, whether or not the special symbol variation processing is being executed) (step S3201). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 3 (that is, if the special symbol variation processing is being executed), the CPU 56 sets the special symbol display control data for the special symbol variation display for the special symbol display control data setting. A process of setting or updating the output buffer is performed (step S3202). In this case, the CPU 56 sets or updates special symbol display control data for performing variable display of the special symbol. For example, if the changing speed is 1 frame / 0.2 seconds, the value of the special symbol display control data set in the output buffer is incremented by 1 each time 0.2 seconds elapses. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The variation display of the special symbol on the special symbol display 8a, 8b is executed.

If the value of the special symbol process flag is not 3, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, whether or not the special symbol stop process is being executed) (step S3203) ). If the value of the special symbol process flag is 4 (that is, when transition to special symbol stop processing), the CPU 56 is a special symbol for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol set in the special symbol normal processing. A process of setting display control data in an output buffer for setting special symbol display control data is performed (step S3204). In this case, CPU 5
6 sets special symbol display control data for stopping and displaying the stop symbol of the special symbol. Then, display control processing (see step S22) is executed, and drive signals are output to the special symbol displays 8a and 8b according to the contents of the output buffer for setting the special symbol display control data. The stop symbol of the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the special symbol display 8a, 8b. In addition, since the setting data is not changed after the processing of step S3204 is executed and the special symbol display control data for stopping symbol display is set, the latest special symbol display control data in the display control processing of step S22 Based on, the latest stop symbol will continue to be displayed stopped until the next variable display is started. In addition, if the value of the special symbol process flag is either 2 or 3 in step S3201 (ie, if it is either the display result designation command transmission process or the special symbol variation processing), for the special symbol variation display The special symbol display control data may be updated. In this case, in order to prevent a shift between the variation time recognized on the game control microcomputer 560 side and the variation time recognized on the effect control microcomputer 200 side, the display result designation command transmission process also varies. The time timer may be configured to be decremented by one.

In this embodiment, the special symbol display control data is set in the output buffer according to the value of the special symbol process flag, but in the special symbol process processing, the start flag is set at the start of variation of the special symbol. At the same time, the end flag may be set at the end of the variation of the special symbol. Then, in the special symbol display control process (step S36), the CPU 56 starts updating the value of the special symbol display control data based on the setting of the start flag, and based on the end flag being set. The special symbol display control data may be set to stop and display the stop symbol.

Next, an external output signal output from the gaming machine 1 will be described. In this embodiment, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control (specifically, the CPU 56) performs the information output process (step S29), the process of step S2015X in the first special symbol stop process, and the second special symbol stop process. By executing the same processing as step S2015X, an external output signal is output to an external device such as a hole management computer via the external output terminal board provided in the gaming machine 1.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory view for explaining an external output signal outputted by the gaming machine 1. A winning ball signal is assigned to the terminal 01 of the external output terminal board. The prize ball signal is a signal that is externally output each time a predetermined number (10 in this example) of prize balls are paid out. Further, the jackpot signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 05 of the external output terminal board. The jackpot signal 1 is a signal that is output continuously continuously throughout the period of all jackpot games. Further, the jackpot signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 06 of the external output terminal board. The big hit signal 2 is a signal continuously output to the outside during the period of all the big hit games, during the probability change state, and during the KT state (during the first KT state, during the second KT state). Further, a special winning opening signal is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope. The special winning opening winning signal is a signal which is externally output based on the detection of the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 24. Further, to the terminal 09 of the external output terminal board, a winning ball scheduled number signal is assigned. The prize ball scheduled number signal is a signal that is externally output each time the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out reaches a predetermined number (10 in this example).

Although the example shown in FIG. 32 shows the case where the common special winning opening winning signal is externally outputted without discriminating whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state, such an embodiment It is not limited. For example, different special winning opening winning signal may be externally output depending on whether it is in the first KT state or the second KT state. FIG. 33 is an explanatory view for explaining a modification of the external output signal outputted by the gaming machine 1. In the modification shown in FIG. 33, the special winning opening signal 1 is assigned to the terminal 07 of the external output terminal slope, and the special winning opening signal 2 is assigned to the terminal 08 of the external output terminal slope. . The special winning opening winning signal 1 is a signal which is externally output based on the detection of the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 24 in the first KT state. The special winning opening winning signal 2 is a signal which is externally output based on the detection of the winning of the gaming ball to the special winning opening 24 in the second KT state.

In addition, in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, it may be configured to provide a small hit dedicated signal that is continuously output to the outside during the small hit game period.

Next, normal symbol process processing (step S26C) executed by the game control microcomputer 560 will be described. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing an example of the normal symbol process processing. In the normal symbol process processing, the game control microcomputer 560 (
Specifically, when it is detected that the gaming ball passes through the gate 32 and the gate switch 32a is turned on (step S5111), the CPU 56) executes gate switch passing processing (step S5112). Then, the CPU 56 executes one of the processes shown in steps S5100 to S5103 according to the value of the normal symbol process flag.

Gate switch passing process (step S5112): The CPU 56 confirms whether the count value (gate passing memory number) of the gate passing memory counter has reached the maximum value (“4” in this example). If the maximum value is not reached, the count value of the gate passage storage counter is incremented by one. In addition, according to the value of a gate passage memory | storage counter, LED of normal symbol reservation memory display 41 is lighted. Then, the CPU 56 extracts the value of the random symbol determination random number (random 4) per normal symbol, and performs processing for storing the value in the storage area (normal symbol determination buffer) corresponding to the value of the gate passage storage number.

Normal symbol normal processing (step S5100): The CPU 56 can start changing the normal symbol (for example, when the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating step S100, specifically, the normal symbol In the case where the variable symbol display of the normal symbol is not made on the display 10 and the opening / closing operation of the variable winning ball device 15 is not based on the fact that the symbol is derived and displayed on the normal symbol display 10) Check the value of the number. Specifically, the count value of the gate passing memory number counter is confirmed. If the gate passing memory number is not 0, it is determined whether or not to hit (whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is hit or not).
Then, the variation time of the normal symbol is set to the normal symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is changed to the normal symbol variation process (step S5101)
To a value (specifically, "1") indicating.

Normal symbol variation processing (step S5101): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if timed out, sets the normal symbol stop symbol display time to the normal symbol process timer and starts the timer. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value indicating the normal symbol stop processing (step S5102) (specifically, "2")
Update to

Normal symbol stop processing (step S5102): The CPU 56 confirms whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, confirms whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is hit or not. If it is not a hit symbol (if it is a lost symbol), the value of the normal symbol process flag is a value (specifically, “specifically” indicating the normal symbol process (step S5100)
Update to 0 "). On the other hand, if the stop symbol of the ordinary symbol is a hit symbol, the ordinary electric character combination opening time is set to the ordinary symbol process timer, and the timer is started. Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "5") indicating the ordinary electric character product opening pre-processing (step S5102A).

Normal motor combination opening pre-processing (step S5102A): CPU56 confirms whether or not the normal pattern process timer has timed out, and if it has timed out, set the normal motor combination product operating time to the normal pattern process timer, the timer Start the variable winning ball device 15
Start opening the Then, the value of the ordinary symbol process flag is updated to a value (specifically, "3") indicating the ordinary electric service part operation process (step S5103).

Normal electric combination product operation processing (step S5103): The CPU 56 measures the normal symbol process timer, and closes the variable winning ball device 15 when the normal symbol process timer times out. Then, the value of the normal symbol process flag is normally processed normally (step S5100)
To a value (specifically, "0") indicating.

FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing normal symbol normal processing (step S5100). In the normal symbol normal processing, the CPU 56 confirms whether the number of gate passage memories is 0 or not by confirming the count value of the gate passage memory number counter (step S5121)
. If the number of gate passage memories is 0 (Y in step S5121), the process ends. If the gate passage storage number is not 0 (N in step S5121), the CPU 56 reads a random value per regular symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the gate passage storage number = 1 (step S5122). Then, the CPU 56 sets the value of the gate passing memory number counter to 1
Then, the contents of each storage area are reduced (step S5123). That is, the random number value for determination per normal symbol stored in the storage area corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the storage region corresponding to the number of gate passage memories = n−1. Store. Therefore, the order in which the random value for determination for a regular symbol stored in each storage area corresponding to each gate passage memory number is extracted is always the gate passage memory number = 1, 2, 3, 4 and It is supposed to match.

Next, the CPU 56 uses the normal symbol determination table to determine whether or not the normal symbol is hit.

FIG. 36 is an explanatory view showing a normal symbol determination table. The normal symbol judgment table is R
A set of data stored in the OM 54, a table for which a standard symbol determination value is set, which is compared with a regular symbol determination random number (random 4), and a normal symbol used in a normal state There are a determination table and a KT normal symbol determination table used in the KT state.

As shown in FIG. 36, in this embodiment, it is determined to be a hit with a probability of 1/10 in the normal state and a probability of 10/11 in the KT state. In the present embodiment, the probability of becoming a normal symbol is different between the normal state and the KT state, and the start winning to the second start winning opening 14 is more likely to occur in the KT state than in the normal state. Although the small hit is apt to occur, the probability of being a normal symbol hit may be the same between the normal state and the KT state.

Specifically, if the KT state is in effect (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is set), the CPU 56 selects the KT normal symbol determination table (Y in step S5123A).
, S 5123 B), if it is in the normal state (if the first KT flag or the second KT flag is not set), select the normal normal symbol determination table (N, S in step S 5123 A)
5123C).

Then, if the CPU 56 is in the KT state in step S5124, the process proceeds to step S5.
It is determined whether or not the random number value for determination per normal symbol read out in 122 is a value within the range of [3 to 12], and if it is a normal state, the random number value for determination per normal pattern read out in step S5122 It is determined whether or not [3]. If it is a hit, a hit symbol is set as a display result (step S5125), and the process proceeds to step S5130A.

Further, in step S5124, when the read random symbol value for determining a normal symbol is not within the range of the hit, the CPU 56 sets an out symbol as a display result (step S5126).
), The process proceeds to step S5130A.

In step S4130A, if the first KT flag is set, CPU 56 sets 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (step S).
5130 Y, S5130 B). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, in the normal state or the second KT state, 1.0 second is set as the normal symbol variation time in the normal symbol process timer (N in step S5130, S5130C).

Then, the game control microcomputer 560 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "1") indicating the normal symbol variation process (step S5101) (step S5131).

FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing normal symbol variation processing (step S5101). In the normal symbol variation processing, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S5141). If the normal pattern process timer has not timed out (step S
N in 5141, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step S5)
144).

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the variation time of the normal symbol has passed (Y in step S5141), the CPU 56 corresponds to the normal symbol process timer with 0.2 seconds as the normal symbol stop symbol display time Set the value (step S5142)
). Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the normal symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "2") indicating the normal symbol stop process (step S5102) (step S5143).

FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing the normal symbol stopping process (step S5102). In the normal symbol stopping process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step S3701). Then, the CPU 56 checks whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3702). If the normal pattern process timer has not timed out (N in step S3702), the process ends.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the normal symbol stop symbol display time has elapsed (Y in step S3702), the CPU 56 determines whether the stop symbol of the normal symbol is hit or not (step S5124) Is determined (step S3703). In addition, whether the stop symbol of a normal symbol is a hit symbol is, for example,
When it is determined in step S5124 that a hit is determined, the normal symbol hit determination flag is set, and whether or not the flag is set can be confirmed.

When it is determined that the stop symbol of the normal symbol is not the hit symbol but the off symbol (N in step S3703), the CPU 56 normally processes the value of the normal symbol process flag as the normal symbol processing (
Update to a value (specifically, "0") indicating step S5100) (step S3708)
.

In step S3703, when the stop symbol of the normal symbol is a hit symbol (Y in step S3703), CPU 56 determines whether or not the first KT flag is set (
Step S3704) If it is set, that is, if it is in the first KT state, 0.1 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the opening of the normal motor combination (step S3706). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if it is in the normal state or the second KT state, 2.6 seconds is set in the normal symbol process timer as the time before the opening of the normal motor combination (step S3705) .

Then, CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "5") corresponding to the processing for opening the ordinary electric symbol (step S5102A) (step S516).
4)

FIG. 39 is a flow chart showing a process for pre-opening of the ordinary motor-operated part (step S5102A). In the normal electric combination product opening pre-processing, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the normal symbol process timer by 1 (step S3801). Then, the CPU 56 confirms whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether or not the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3802). If the normal pattern process timer has not timed out (N in step S3802), the process ends.

When the normal symbol process timer has timed out, that is, when the time before the opening of the electric motor combination has elapsed (Y in step S3802), the CPU 56 determines whether the first KT flag is set (step S3803) , If set, ie
If it is in the first KT state, 5.5 seconds is set as the normal motor combination time open time in the normal symbol process timer (step S3805). If the first KT flag is not set, that is, if the normal state or the second KT state, 0.2 second is set in the normal symbol process timer as the normal motor opening time (step S3804).

As described above, in the present embodiment, in the first KT state, the normal motorized part opening time is 5.5.
By setting the seconds and setting 0.2 seconds as the normal motor opening time in the normal state or the second KT state, the first KT state is started at the second start winning opening 14 rather than the normal state or the second KT state. It is easy to win a prize. Therefore, in the first KT state, the game ball is configured to be less likely to reach the special variable winning ball device 22 provided downstream of the variable winning ball device 15 than in the normal state or the second KT state.

It should be noted that the control method of facilitating the start winning at the second start winning opening 14 when the gaming state is the first KT state is not limited to that shown in this embodiment. For example,
When in the KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened more times than in the normal state or the second KT state (for example, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened in the normal state or the second KT state) In the first KT state, control may be performed to set two times as the number of times of opening of the variable winning ball device 15, while setting one as the number of times. If you do that,
In the first KT state, by increasing the number of times the variable winning ball device 15 is opened,
The second start winning opening 14 can be made easier to start winning.

Further, for example, in the case of the first KT state, control for lengthening the open time of the variable winning ball device 15 described above as compared with the case of the normal state or the second KT state; The control may be performed in combination with control for increasing the number of times of release.

Next, the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 to an open state (step S380).
6). Specifically, the solenoid 16 is driven to open the variable winning ball device 15.

Then, the CPU 56 updates the value of the special symbol process flag to a value (specifically, "3") corresponding to the ordinary electric winning combination processing process (step S5103) (step S3807)
.

FIG. 40 is a flow chart showing the ordinary electric power part operation process (step S5103). In the ordinary motor-operated part operation process, the CPU 56 decrements the value of the ordinary symbol process timer by 1 (step S3901). Then, it is checked whether the value of the normal symbol process timer has become 0, that is, whether the normal symbol process timer has timed out (step S3902). If the normal pattern process timer has not timed out (step S39
01 N), the process ends.

In step S3902, when the normal symbol process timer has timed out (Y in step S3902), the CPU 56 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state (step S3911). Specifically, the variable winning ball device 15 is turned off by stopping the drive of the solenoid 16.
Put in a closed state.

Then, the CPU 56 performs normal symbol normal processing of the value of the normal symbol process flag (step S
5100) is updated to a value (specifically, "0") (step S3912).

Next, the operation of the effect control means will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing main processing executed by the effect control microcomputer 200 (specifically, effect control CPU 201) mounted on the effect control board 80. When the power is turned on, the effect control CPU 201 starts execution of the main processing. In the main processing, first, initialization processing is performed to clear the RAM area, set various initial values, and initialize the timer for determining activation intervals of effect control (step S 701). After that, the effect control CPU 201 shifts to loop processing for monitoring the timer interrupt flag (step S702). When a timer interrupt occurs, the effect control CPU 201 sets a timer interrupt flag in the timer interrupt process. In the main process, if the timer interrupt flag is set, the CPU for effect control
The step 201 clears the flag (step S703), and executes the following effect control processing.

In the effect control process, the effect control CPU 201 first analyzes the received effect control command, and sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command (command analysis process:
Step S704). Next, the effect control CPU 201 performs a first decorative symbol process process (step S705A). In the first decorative symbol process process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (first effect control process flag) is selected to execute the display control of the first variable display portion 9a. . Further, the second decorative symbol process process is performed (step S705B). In the second decorative symbol process process, among the processes corresponding to the control state, the process corresponding to the current control state (second effect control process flag) is selected to execute the display control of the second variable display unit 9b. . Further, the background symbol process processing for controlling the display state of the background symbol display portion 9c is executed (step S706). Also, the symbol hold storage display unit 18
A pending storage display control process for controlling the display state of c is executed (step S 707). Further, a random number updating process is performed to update the counter value of the counter for generating a random number such as the notice determination random number (step S 708). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S702.

FIG. 42 is an explanatory view showing a configuration example of a command reception buffer for storing the effect control command received from the game control microcomputer 560 of the main substrate 31. As shown in FIG. In this example, a ring buffer type command reception buffer capable of storing six 2-byte effect control commands is used. Therefore, the command reception buffer is the reception command buffer 1
It consists of 12 bytes of ~ 12. Then, a command reception number counter indicating which area the received command is to be stored is used. The command reception counter is 0
It takes a value of ~ 11. The ring buffer type may not necessarily be used.

The effect control command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 is received in an interrupt process based on the effect control INT signal, and is stored in a buffer area formed in the RAM. In the command analysis process, it is analyzed which command (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is the effect control command stored in the buffer area. Production control I
The interrupt processing based on the NT signal is executed prior to the timer interrupt processing which is executed every 4 ms.

43 to 45 are flowcharts showing a specific example of the command analysis process (step S704). Although the effect control command received from the main board 31 is stored in the reception command buffer, in the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 confirms the content of the command stored in the command reception buffer.

In the command analysis process, the effect control CPU 201 first confirms whether or not a reception command is stored in the command reception buffer (step S611). Whether or not it is stored is determined by comparing the value of the command reception number counter with the read pointer. The case where the two match each other is the case where the reception command is not stored. If the reception command is stored in the command reception buffer, the effect control CPU 201 reads the reception command from the command reception buffer (step S612). Note that when read out, the value of the read pointer is incremented by 2 (step S613). The reason for +2 is that two bytes (one command) are read at a time.

If the received effect control command is a change pattern command (step S614), the effect control CPU 201 stores the received change pattern command in the change pattern command storage area formed in the RAM (step S615). Then, the variation pattern command reception flag is set (step S616).

If the received effect control command is the display result designation command (step S617), the effect control CPU 201 forms the received display result designation command (display result 1 designation command to display result 4 designation command) in the RAM. The command is stored in the display result designation command storage area (step S618A).

If the received effect control command is the symbol determination designation command (step S619), the effect control CPU 201 sets a determination command reception flag (step S620).
The confirmation command reception flag is a flag indicating that the symbol confirmation designation command has been received normally. Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 executes a process at the time of confirmation command reception (step S620A).

If the received effect control command is the first jackpot start designation command or the second jackpot start designation command (step S621), the CPU 201 for production control, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag or the second jackpot start designation command reception flag Is set (step S622). In this embodiment, the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag set in step S622 are also referred to as fanfare flags.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 ends the instruction notification (step S3804). The instruction notification is an effect to notify the hitting of the game ball, and the first instruction notification for prompting launch of the game ball to the substantially right side of the game area 7 and the second for prompting launch of the game ball to the operation gate 17 An instruction notification is provided. In addition, as the first instruction notification, “right-handed” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9
A first normal instruction notification for displaying an image including the character and a first reduction instruction notification for displaying an image including the character “right-handed” on a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9 are provided. In addition, as a second instruction notification, a second normal instruction notification that displays an image including the characters “Aim at the gate” on the entire surface of the effect display device 9, and “gate” at a part (upper right portion) of the effect display device 9. A second reduction instruction notification is provided to display an image including the characters "Aim for the purpose".

In the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the first instruction notification is started, and passage of the game ball to the gate 32 is not detected until 10 seconds have passed since the first instruction notification was started. In this case, the image of the second instruction notification is superimposed on the image of the first instruction notification.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 resets an instruction notification timer for measuring a period from when the instruction notification is switched from the first instruction notification to the second instruction notification (step S380).
5)

If the received effect control command is a big hit end designation command (step S623),
The effect control CPU 201 sets a big hit end designation command reception flag (step S 624 A). In this embodiment, the big hit end designated command reception flag set in step S624A is also referred to as an ending flag.

If the received effect control command is a small hit start designation command (step S625),
The effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit start designation command reception flag (step S 626).

If the received effect control command is a small hit end designation command (step S 627),
The effect control CPU 201 sets a small hit end designation command reception flag (step S 628).

If the received effect control command is low probability / non-KT background designation (step S630), the effect control CPU 201 displays the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 in a background screen according to the low probability / non KT state (for example, , The background screen of the display color of blue)) (step S631). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets a first KT state flag indicating that the first KT state is in effect (step S632).

If the received effect control command is low probability / first KT background designation (step S633),
The CPU 201 for effect control changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen according to the low probability / first KT state (for example, a background screen of green display color) (step S634).
. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the first KT state flag (step S63).
5). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the probability variation state flag indicating that it is a probability variation state, and the second KT status flag that indicates a second KT state (step S 636).

If the received effect control command is high probability / first KT background designation (step S637),
The CPU 201 for effect control changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen according to the high probability / first KT state (for example, a background screen of yellow display color) (step S638)
. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the first KT state flag (step S639). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second KT state flag (step S640).

If the received effect control command is high probability / second KT background designation (step S641),
The effect control CPU 201 changes the background screen displayed on the effect display device 9 to a background screen according to the high probability / second KT state (for example, a background screen of red display color) (step S 642).
. Further, the effect control CPU 201 sets the probability variation state flag and the second KT state flag (step S643). If the effect control CPU 201 is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the first KT state flag (step S644).

If the received effect control command is a special winning opening winning combination designation command (step S650)
The effect control CPU 201 adds 15 (corresponding to the number of winning balls per winning to the large winning opening) to the first winning ball counter and the second winning ball counter (step S651).

The first prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the consecutive villas, and it is used as a big prize in all the big hit games generated during the large hit game and the consecutive villas that triggered the start of the consecutive villas. Probability change state during the winning ball and consecutive villas based on the game ball winning, the first KT state and the second KT
A winning ball based on the fact that the gaming ball has won the special winning opening 24 in all the small hit games generated in the state is added at any time. Also, the second prize ball number counter is a counter for counting the number of prize balls in the second KT state, and all the big hit games generated during the big hit game and the second KT state triggered the start of the second KT state The winning balls based on the winning of the game ball at the special winning opening 24 in the small winning game generated during the second KT state and the winning ball based on the winning of the gaming ball to the large winning opening is added at any time.

In addition, if the effect control CPU 201 is displaying the continuous prize ball number display indicating the number of award balls in the continuous display on the effect display device 9, based on the value of the first prize ball number counter after addition. The second prize ball number counter after addition is updated if the special rush middle prize ball number display indicating the number of prize balls in the second KT state is displayed in the effect display device 9 while updating the number of consecutive prize balls number display. The special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of (step S652).

If the received effect control command is a special prize winning combination designation command (step S653)
The effect control CPU 201 adds 10 (corresponding to the number of winning balls per winning to the special winning opening 24) to the first winning balls number counter and the second winning balls number counter (step S654).
). In addition, if the CPU for effect control 201 is displaying the continuous prize ball number display, it updates the continuous prize ball number display based on the value of the first prize ball number counter after the addition, and the special rush If the middle prize ball number display is being displayed, the special rush middle prize ball number display is updated based on the value of the second prize ball number counter after the addition (step S655).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether the second KT state flag is set (step S656). If the second KT state flag is set (ie,
If it is in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 causes the effect display device 9 to display an award ball addition display (for example, character display such as "+10") (step S657). Also,
The effect control CPU 201 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined winning sound (step S6).
At the same time as step 58), the special winning opening lamp 24a is turned on (step S659).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (if it is not the second KT state), the process returns to step S611 without executing the process of steps S657 to S659.

In this embodiment, the processes of steps S656 to S659 are executed.
On the basis of the game ball having won the special winning opening 24 during the second KT state, the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are performed, while the special winning opening is displayed. Even if the gaming ball has won a prize, if it is not the second KT state, the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not performed.

In addition, it is not necessary to display all of the display of the prize ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a, and it is configured to execute only one or two of them. You may

If the received effect control command is the first customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4)
301) The effect control CPU 201 sets a first demo command reception flag indicating that the first customer wait demo display specification command has been received (step S4302).

If the received effect control command is a second customer waiting demo display specification command (step S4)
303), the effect control CPU 201 sets a second demo command reception flag indicating that the second customer wait demo display specification command has been received (step S4304).

If the received effect control command is another command, the effect control CPU 201 sets a flag corresponding to the received effect control command or executes processing (step S6).
70). Then, the process proceeds to step S611.

FIG. 46 is a flowchart of a process of receiving a confirmation command. Effect control CPU 2
01 determines whether or not the symbol displayed in a stopped state is a big hit symbol by determining whether any of the display result 2 designated command to the display result 6 designated command is stored in the display result designated command storage area or not Is determined (step S4401). When any of the display result 2 designation command to display result 6 designation command is stored in the display result designation command storage area, that is, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed, the received symbol confirmation designation command is the second symbol confirmation designation It is determined whether or not it is a command (step S4401A), and if it is the first symbol design designation command, the process proceeds to step S4404.

If the received symbol determination specification command is the second symbol determination specification command, the effect control CP
U201 determines whether or not it is in the normal state (step S4401B), and if it is in the KT state (if any one of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set) step S
Migrate to 4404.

If it is in the normal state, the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not the under display preparation flag indicating that the big hit preparation display has already been executed indicating that the big hit is being changed is set (step S4402) If it is set, the display flag under preparation is reset (step S4403), and the process proceeds to step S4404.

In step S4404, the CPU 201 for production control starts the first normal instruction notification (step S4404), and sets a value corresponding to 10 seconds to the instruction notification timer (step S4).
4406).

Further, in step S4402, if the under-provisioning display flag indicating that the under-provisioning display has been performed is not set, the effect control CPU 201 starts the first reduction instruction notification (step S4405), and proceeds to step S4406. Do. Under preparation display is an effect that is executed when fluctuation of the first special symbol is started during the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol in the normal state, and more specifically, the character "in preparation for the big hit" It is an effect that an image including is displayed on the effect display device 9. In this embodiment, a case is shown where a still image including the character "big hit ready" is displayed, but not limited to such a mode, for example, a big hit game is started as a ready display. Period (the remaining fluctuation time of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol)
It may be configured to perform display corresponding to

Thus, in the present embodiment, when the big hit symbol of the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Also, when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, KT
If it is in the state, the first normal instruction notification is performed. Moreover, when the big hit symbol of the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification is performed only when the preparation display is being performed, and the preparation display is not being performed. Performs the first reduction instruction notification.

FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing the background symbol process shown in FIG. 41 (step S706).
First, the effect control CPU 201 performs instruction notification control processing for performing control regarding instruction notification (step S4501), and performs demonstration display control processing for performing control regarding demonstration display (
Step S4502) is performed.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 executes step S according to the value of the background symbol process flag.
One of the processes from 900 to S908 is performed. In each process, the following process is performed.

Background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900): It is determined whether a variation start condition of the background symbol is established, and when the variation start condition of the background symbol is established, the variation is started in the background symbol display portion 9c To control. The fluctuation start condition of the background pattern is satisfied when it is confirmed in the command analysis process that any fluctuation pattern command has been received. And
The background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol variation start process (step S901).

Background symbol variation start processing (step S901): Control is performed such that the variation of the background symbol on the left, middle and right is started. Further, the stop symbol of the background symbol is determined in accordance with the received display result command, and the variation time of the background symbol is set. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation processing (step S902).

Background pattern variation processing (step S902): The end of the variation time of the background pattern is monitored. When the variation time is over, the background symbol process flag value is processed to stop the background symbol (step S90)
Update to the value corresponding to 3). In addition, CPU2 for effect control in processing during background design fluctuation
01 may extend the variation time of the background pattern.

Background symbol stop processing (step S 903): The control of stopping the variation of the background symbol and displaying the stop symbol is performed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900), the big hit display process (step S904), or the small hit middle process (step S908). In addition, when updating to a value corresponding to the big hit display process (step S904), the big hit display process (step S904) on condition that the first big hit start designated command or the second big hit start designated command is received. Update to the value corresponding to Also, when updating to a value corresponding to the small hit middle processing (step S 908), the small hit middle display processing (step S on the condition that the small hit start designation command is received).
Update to the value corresponding to 908).

Big hit display process (step S904): Control of the big hit display is performed. Then, when the big winning opening open indication command (high winning opening opening indication command for the first round) indicating that the big hit game is actually started is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is processed during the round ( It updates to the value corresponding to step S905).

In-round process (step S 905): Display control in the round is performed. For example, when a large winning opening opening display command indicating that the large winning opening is being opened is received, display control or the like of the number of rounds is performed.

Post-round processing (step S906): Perform display control between rounds. For example, upon receiving a display command after the opening of the special winning opening indicating that the special winning opening is opened (closed), interval display is performed.

Big hit end effect processing (step S 907): Control of the big hit end display after the end of the big hit game. For example, when an ending specification command (a first ending specification command, a second ending specification command) for specifying the end of the big hit is received, an ending effect is executed. Then, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value corresponding to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

Small hit middle processing (step S 908): Display control in the small hit game is performed. Then, when the small hitting end designation command is received, the value of the background symbol process flag is updated to the value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900).

FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing instruction notification control processing. In the instruction notification control process, the CPU 201 for production control determines whether or not the first instruction notification is in progress (step S).
4601) If the first instruction informing is being performed, the value of the instruction informing timer is decremented by 1 (step S460).
2) It is determined whether the instruction notification timer times out (step S4603). If it has timed out (when 10 seconds have passed since the execution of the first instruction notification), the second normal instruction notification is started if the first normal instruction notification is being executed (Y in step S3503, S4603)
5) If the first reduction instruction notification is being executed, the second reduction display notification is started (step S45)
06).

Thus, in the present embodiment, the second instruction notification is executed 10 seconds after the start of the first instruction notification. In addition, when the first normal instruction notification is being performed, the second normal instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds, and when the first reduction instruction notification is being performed, the second reduction instruction notification is performed after 10 seconds. It becomes.

When the second instruction notification is executed, the second instruction notification image may be superimposed on the first instruction notification image, or the first instruction notification image may be erased and the second instruction notification image may be deleted. It may be displayed.

49 and 50 are flowcharts showing the demonstration display control process. In the demonstration display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the first demo command reception flag is set (step S4701), and if not set, the process proceeds to step S470.
Move to 6 If it is set, it is determined whether or not it is in the normal state (step S
4702) If not in the normal state, the process moves to step S4705. Specifically, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is established.

In the normal state, the effect control CPU 201 takes time until the first demonstration display starts (
For example, a first demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set (step S4703), and a first demonstration waiting flag indicating that the first demonstration display is on standby is set (step S4704). Then, the first demonstration reception flag is reset (step S
4705).

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the first demo standby flag is set or not (step S4706), and if it is set, the first special symbol variation is started (step S4707). When it is controlled to the big hit game state based on the fluctuation of Y), or the second special symbol (Y of step S4708), it moves to step S4712.
Thereby, the first demonstration display is not executed when the first special symbol variation is started or the big hit gaming state is controlled based on the variation of the second special symbol. Specifically, in step S4707, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the first decorative symbol is received, it is determined that the first special symbol variation has been started. In step S4708, when the second jackpot start designation command is received, it is determined that the jackpot gaming state is controlled based on the fluctuation of the second special symbol.

The first demo standby flag is set, the first special symbol variation is not started (N in step S4707), and the jackpot gaming state is not controlled based on the second special symbol variation (N in step S4708) , 1 decrements the value of the first demonstration standby timer (step S4709)
If the first demonstration standby timer has timed out, the first demonstration display is started (step S4711), and the first demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4712).

Thereafter, when the first demo display is under way for the effect control CPU 201 (step S4713)
Y), if the first special symbol variation is started (Y in step S4714), or if it is controlled to the jackpot gaming state based on the second special symbol variation (Y in step S4715)
, And the first demonstration display is ended (step S4716).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether the second demo command reception flag is set (step S4801), and if it is not set, the process proceeds to step S4806. If it is set, it is determined whether it is in the KT state (step S480)
2) If it is not in the KT state, the process proceeds to step S4805. Specifically, if any one of the first KT flag and the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the KT state is in effect.

In the KT state, the CPU 201 for effect control starts time until the second demonstration display starts (
For example, a second demonstration standby timer for measuring a value corresponding to 30 seconds is set (step S4803), and a second demonstration waiting flag indicating that the second demonstration display is on standby is set (step S4804). Then, the second demonstration reception flag is reset (step S
4805).

Thereafter, the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not the second demo standby flag is set (step S4806), and if it is set, the second special symbol variation is started (step S4807). Y) or not in the KT state (step S4808)
N), the process proceeds to step S4812. Thereby, the second demonstration display is not executed when the second special symbol variation is started or the KT state is ended. Specifically, when the variation pattern command indicating the variation of the second decorative symbol is received in step S4807, it is determined that the second special symbol variation has been started. In step S4808, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the KT state has ended.

If the second demo standby flag is set and the second special symbol variation has not started (N in step S4807) and the KT state has not ended (Y in step S4808), the value of the second demo standby timer Is decremented by 1 (step S4809), and when the second demonstration standby timer times out, the second demonstration display is started (step S4811), and the second demonstration standby flag is reset (step S4812).

Thereafter, when the second demo is being displayed (step S4813)
Of the second special symbol is started (Y in step S4814), or when the KT state ends (N in step S4815), the second demonstration display is ended (step S4)
816).

FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing background symbol variation start processing (step S901).
In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 determines a stop symbol of the background symbol (step S920). In this embodiment, when the display result 1 designation command is received (when it is determined to be out of alignment), only the outlying out left out pattern or the left and right background patterns are matched. Determine the combination of the out of reach pattern. In addition, when the display result 2 specification command is received (when it is determined that 16R probability variation big hit)
To determine the combination of symbols in which the left, middle, and right background symbols are aligned with an odd number of symbols. In addition, when the display result 3 specified command and the display result 5 specified command are received (when it is determined that 6R positive variation big hit or 2R positive variation big hit), the combination of the symbols in which the left middle background pattern is even Decide. In addition, when the display result 4 specified command or the display result 6 specified command is received (when it is determined that 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit), the same combination as reach deviation pattern where only the left and right background patterns are matched Decide. In addition, when the display result 7 specification command is received (when it is decided that it is small hitting), small hitting design (for example, “13
5) Determine the combination of background patterns.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table according to the fluctuation pattern of the background pattern to be used according to the fluctuation pattern indicated by the received fluctuation pattern command (step S921). Then, the process timer set value of process data 1 in the selected process table is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S922). Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes control of the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speakers 27) according to the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number data 1). (Step S923). For example, in order to display an image according to the variation pattern in the background symbol display unit 9c, VDP
A control signal (display control execution data) is output to 209. Further, in order to control various lamps to turn on / off, a control signal (lamp control execution data) is output to the lamp driver board 35. In addition, in order to output audio from the speaker 27, the audio output board 70
Outputs a control signal (sound number data).

When execution of continuous effect is designated in the variation pattern (in the case of the second variation pattern # 17, # 18), the process of step S923 and the background symbol variation processing described later according to the process table selected in step S921 By performing the process of step S 944, the continuous effect is performed during the change display of the background pattern. In addition, when execution of the battle effect is designated in the fluctuation pattern (second fluctuation pattern # 11, # 12, # 14
, # 15, and # 18), the process of step S923 and the process of step S944 of the background symbol variation process described later are executed according to the process table selected in step S921, and the battle effect is displayed during the variation pattern of the background symbol Is executed.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 sets a value corresponding to the fluctuation time to the background symbol fluctuation time timer and starts the background symbol fluctuation time timer (step S 924). Then, the background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol variation processing (step S902) (step S925).

FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the background symbol variation in progress processing (step S902) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol variation processing, the CPU 201 for effect control
First, the value of the process timer is decremented by 1 (step S940), and the value of the normal symbol variation time timer is decremented by 1 (step S941). When the process timer times out (step S942), the process data is switched. That is, the process timer set value set next in the process table is set in the process timer (step S).
943). Also, the control state of the rendering device is changed based on the display control execution data, lamp control execution data, and sound number data set next to the display control execution data (step S 944).
).

Next, the CPU 201 for effect control checks whether or not the continuation effect is executed during the fluctuation display of the background symbol, and confirms whether it is the start timing of the continuation effect (step S94).
5). In addition, it can be determined by, for example, confirming whether or not the second fluctuation patterns # 17 and # 18 are designated by the received fluctuation pattern command. Moreover, it can be determined by checking the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in step S 924 of the background symbol variation start process, for example, whether or not it is the start timing of the continuous effect. If it is the start timing of the continuous effect, the CPU 20 for effect control
In step S946, the effect display device 9 displays an indication of the number of winning prize balls on the basis of the current value of the first prize ball number counter. In this embodiment, when in the second KT state, the special rush in progress ball number display is displayed (see step S9010 described later), but the start timing of the continuation effect in the second KT state Then, in addition to the special rush middle prize ball number display, the continuous twin middle ball number display is also displayed by executing the process of step S946.

Next, the CPU 201 for effect control is the case of executing the first KT transition effect during the fluctuation display of the background symbol, and confirms whether or not it is the start timing of the first effect (step S947). Note that whether or not to execute the first KT transition effect can be determined, for example, by confirming whether or not the second fluctuation pattern # 18 is designated by the received fluctuation pattern command. That is, in this embodiment, when the variation display of the background symbol is executed based on the second variation pattern # 18, is the continuation effect executed during the variation display of the background symbol and the second KT state continues? After being suggested whether or not, the first KT transition effect is executed, the effect is performed as if the second KT state ended and the first KT state was transitioned (but,
At this stage, internally, the second KT state has not yet ended, and exactly, it is at the start of the big hit that the second KT state is ended), and then the battle is developed. In addition, whether or not it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, for example, step S of the background symbol variation start process
It can be determined by confirming the value of the background symbol variation time timer set in 924.

If it is the start timing of the first KT transition effect, the effect control CPU 201 ends the sound output of the second KT music from the speaker 27 (step S948). That is, in this embodiment, when controlled to the second KT state, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit that became the trigger (steps described later Although the process of step S948 is executed, the sound output of the music for the second KT is ended.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 erases the continuous prize ball number display and the special rush intermediate ball number display on the effect display device 9 (step S949). Further, in this embodiment, character display such as "during special rush" is displayed in the second KT state, but character display such as "during special rush" is also erased in step S949.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 executes a background symbol fluctuation time extension process (step S950). That is, in this embodiment, when the variable display of the first special symbol is executed, the variable display of the second special symbol is started, or when the variable display of the second special symbol is performed, the first There is a possibility that the variation display of the special symbol may be started, and the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the second special symbol may be executed in parallel. Therefore, in this embodiment, when the background symbol variation time extension process in step S950 is executed, the other symbol is displayed while the variation display of the background symbol is executed corresponding to the variation display of one of the special symbols. When the fluctuation display of the design is started, the fluctuation pattern of the background design is replaced or the fluctuation time is extended as needed.

In step S950, the CPU 201 for effect control, for example, performs the variation display of the background symbol in response to the variation display of one of the special symbols that become off, the variation display of the other special symbol that becomes the big hit When it is started, it is replaced with the variation pattern of the background symbol corresponding to the special symbol of the big hit and the variation time is extended. In addition, for example, when the variable display of the background symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of one special symbol that becomes the big hit, when the variable display of the other special symbol that becomes the off is started, the background symbol Neither the replacement of the variation pattern nor the extension of the variation time is performed, and the variation display of the background pattern currently being executed is executed as it is. Also, for example, when the variable symbol display of the background symbol is executed corresponding to the variable symbol display of one special symbol symbolizing the big hit, when the variable symbol display of the other special symbol symbol becoming the big hit has already been described, As described above, in this embodiment, since the change display of the special symbol of the person who started later is forced to be canceled on the way, the replacement pattern of the change pattern of the background pattern is not performed, nor the extension of the change time is performed. Execute the variable display of the pattern as it is.

In addition, the CPU 201 for effect control is in the normal state, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is in progress, when the fluctuation of the first special symbol is started (Y in step S5000, Y in S5001
, Y of S5002, the jackpot preparation display is executed (step S5003), and the preparation display flag is set (step S5004). In step S5000, if neither the first KT flag nor the second KT flag is set, it is determined that the normal state is established. In step S5001, a process during variation of the second decorative pattern is executed in the second decorative symbol process process (step S705B), and a display result 2 specifying command for the second decorative pattern
If any of the display result 6 designated commands is stored, it is determined that the big hit of the second special symbol is being changed. In step S5002, when the variation pattern command for the first special symbol is received, it is determined that the variation of the first special symbol is started.

In addition, as described above, when starting the change of the first special symbol while making a big hit change of the second special symbol in the normal state, the change of the first special symbol is forced to be out, but At the time, the game control microcomputer 560 may transmit to the microcomputer 200 for effect control a forced release designation command indicating that the fluctuation of the first special symbol is forced to be released, in which case, the effect control Microcomputer 20
The big hit preparation indication may be executed based on the reception of the forcible disengagement designation command. Alternatively, only when the variable display result is determined to be forced dropout, the game control microcomputer 560 determines a special change pattern which is not determined except for the forced dropout, and a change pattern indicating this special change pattern The command may be transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560 to the effect control microcomputer 200, and the effect control microcomputer 200 may execute the jackpot preparation display based on the reception of the variation pattern command. Good.

Then, if the background symbol variation time timer has timed out (step S 951), the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation stop process (step S 903) (step S 952). ).

FIG. 53 and FIG. 54 are flowcharts showing background symbol fluctuation stop processing (step S903) in the background symbol process processing. In the background symbol fluctuation stop process, the CPU 201 for effect control first confirms whether or not the stop symbol display flag 1 indicating that the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol (step S 970 A) . If the stop symbol display flag 1 is set, the process proceeds to step S974. In this embodiment, when the big hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 1 is set in step S973. Then, when the fanfare effect is executed, the stop symbol display flag 1 is reset. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 1 is set means that the big hit symbol has been finalized but the fanfare effect has not been executed yet, so the process of displaying the stop symbol of the background symbol in step S971 is executed. It transfers to step S974, without doing.

If stop symbol display flag 1 is not set, CPU 201 for effect control checks whether or not stop symbol display flag 2 indicating that a small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol is set. (Step S970B). If the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the process proceeds to step S987. In this embodiment, when the small hit symbol is displayed as the stop symbol of the background symbol, the stop symbol display flag 2 is set in step S986. Then, the stop symbol display flag 2 is reset when the small hit game effect is executed. Therefore, the fact that the stop symbol display flag 2 is set means that the small hit symbol has been determined and displayed but it is a stage at which the effect during the small hit game has not yet been executed, so step S9
The process proceeds to step S987 without executing the process of displaying the stop symbol of the 71 background symbols.

If neither the stop symbol display flag 1 nor the stop symbol display flag 2 is set, the effect control CPU 201 causes the stop symbol (left symbol, big hit symbol, left background symbol during stop display on the effect display device 9) Control to display the small hit symbol) is displayed (step S971).

If the jackpot symbol is displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S972
), Effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S973)
).

Next, the CPU 201 for effect control sets one of the big hit start designated command reception flags (
It is checked whether the first jackpot start designation command reception flag and the second jackpot start designation command reception flag) are set (step S 974). If one of the big hit start designation command reception flags is set, the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 1 (step S 975). The effect control CPU 201 also resets the big hit start designation command reception flag that has been set.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the fanfare effect (step S976). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S977), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1)
Control of the rendering device (the rendering display device 9 as a rendering component, various lamps as a rendering component, and the speaker 27 as a rendering component) is executed according to the sound number data 1) (step S978).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, or the second KT state flag is set (step S979). If all of the probability variation state flag, the first KT state flag, and the second KT state flag are not set (ie, in the case of the low probability / non KT state), the effect control CPU 201 resets the first prize ball number counter. (Step S980). That is, since a big hit occurs in the low probability / non-KT state, so-called first hit occurs, and the first prize ball number counter is reset.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the current big hit is based on the 16R probability variation big hit (step S 981). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether or not the display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for specifying the 16R probability variation big hit has been received, for example. If it is 16R definite variation big hit,
Since it is a case where the big hit game which becomes the opportunity of 2nd KT state start is started, CP for production control
U201 performs control which starts the sound output of the music for 2nd KT from the speaker 27 (step S982).

On the other hand, if the 16R certainty variation big hit is not made, the effect control CPU 201 resets the second prize ball number counter if it is set (step S983). That is, in this case, when in the second KT state, a big hit other than the 16R probability variation big hit occurs and the second KT is generated.
As the state is over, the second prize ball number counter is reset.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 performs a big hit display process of the value of the background symbol process flag (
The value is updated according to step S904) (step S984).

If the small hit symbol is displayed in the process of step S971 (Y in step S985
), Effect control CPU 201 sets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S986
).

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether the small hit start designation command reception flag is set (step S 987). If the small hit start designated command reception flag is set (that is, if the small hit start designated command is received), the effect control CPU 201 resets the stop symbol display flag 2 (step S988).
The effect control CPU 201 also resets the small hit start designated command reception flag that has been set.

Next, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether the second KT state flag is set (step S 989). If the second KT state flag is set (ie,
If in the second KT state), the effect control CPU 201 selects a process table corresponding to the effect during small hit (step S990). Next, the effect control CPU 201 starts the process timer by setting the process timer set value in the process timer (step S 991), and the contents of the process data 1 (display control execution data 1, lamp control execution data 1, sound number According to data 1), a rendering device (a rendering display device 9 as a rendering component,
Control of the various lamps as presentation parts and the speakers 27) as presentation parts is executed (step S992).

Further, the effect control CPU 201 causes the speaker 27 to output a predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 (step S993) and the special winning opening lamp 2
4a is lit and displayed (step S994).

On the other hand, if the second KT state flag is not set (that is, if not in the second KT state), the process proceeds to step S995 without executing the process of steps S990 to S994. By performing the determination process of step S989, in this embodiment, effects in the small hit game are executed only when the small hit game is performed during the second KT state,
A predetermined opening sound corresponding to the opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 is output, and the special winning opening lamp 24 a is lit and displayed.

In this embodiment, there is shown a case where a predetermined opening sound is output and a special winning opening lamp 24a is lighted and displayed when a small hit occurs in the second KT state. I can not. For example, only one of the output of the predetermined open sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a may be performed. Further, for example, even in the second KT state, neither of the output of the predetermined open sound and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a may be executed, and the effect during the small hit game may be generated from the beginning Alternatively, the process may not be executed during the small hit.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value corresponding to the small hitting middle process (step S 908) (step S 995).

When the big hit symbol and the small hit symbol are not displayed in the process of step S971 (ie,
In the case of displaying the off pattern (N in step S972, and N in step S985)
The effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S996).

FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the jackpot end effect process (step S 907) in the background symbol process process. In the big hit end production process, CPU 201 for production control,
First, the value of the effect period measurement timer is decremented by 1 (step S9000). Note that the effect period measurement timer is set based on the end of all rounds of the big hit game in the round post-process (see step S906). Next, the effect control CPU 201
It is confirmed whether the effect period measurement timer has timed out (step S9001).

When the effect period measurement timer has not timed out (N in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9002), and the effect device (effect display device 9 is performed according to the contents of the process data n , And the speaker 27 etc.) (step S9003). For example, an effect of displaying that the big hit ends or displaying a predetermined character is executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9004), and if the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S9005). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer and the process timer is started (step S9006).

If the effect period measurement timer has timed out (Y in step S9001), the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is based on the 6R probability variation big hit or the 2R probability variation big hit (step S9007 ). In addition, whether it is 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit, for example, display result designation command (display result 3 designation command) which designates 6R probability variation big hit or display result designation command which designates 2R probability variation big hit (display result 5 It can be determined by confirming whether or not the designated command has been received. If it is 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit (that is, if it becomes high probability state / 1st KT state after the big hit game end), CPU201 for production control, if it is not indicated,
In the effect display device 9, control is performed to start the display of the continuous prize ball number display based on the first prize ball number counter (step S9008). In step S9008, the effect control CPU 201 performs control of also causing the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during normal rush".

If it is neither 6R probability variation big hit nor 2R probability variation big hit, CPU201 for production control
The CPU checks whether or not the big hit game to be finished this time is based on the 16R probability variation big hit (step S9009). In addition, it can be determined by checking whether or not the display result designation command (display result 2 designation command) for specifying the 16R probability variation big hit has been received, for example. If it is a 16R probability variation big hit (that is, if it is in the high probability state / 2nd KT state after the big hit game end), CPU201 for production control,
If not displayed, in the effect display device 9, control is performed to start the display of the special rush middle prize ball number display based on the second prize ball number counter (step S9010). In step S9010, the effect control CPU 201 performs control of also causing the effect display device 9 to start displaying a character display such as "during a special rush".

In addition, although illustration is omitted in FIG. 55, if the big hit game to be finished this time is based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit (that is, low probability state / after big hit game end)
If it will be in the first KT state), the effect control CPU 201 performs control to start display of character display such as “chance time” in the effect display device 9.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 updates the value of the background symbol process flag to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9011).

FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing a small hit middle process (step S908) in the background symbol process process. In the small hit middle process, the CPU 201 for production control first confirms whether the small hit end designated command reception flag is set or not (step S9201).
). If the small hit end designated command reception flag is not set (that is, if the small hit end designated command is not received yet), the effect control CPU 201 subtracts 1 from the value of the process timer (step S9202). , And executes processing for controlling the rendering device (the rendering display device 9, the speaker 27, etc.) in accordance with the contents of the process data n (step S9203)
). That is, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is continued.

However, as described above, in this embodiment, when not in the second KT state,
Since the process table corresponding to the small hit medium effect is not set in the first place (step S98
9) Even if the small hit end designation command is not received, the effect corresponding to the small hit game is not executed.

Then, the effect control CPU 201 confirms whether or not the process timer has timed out (step S9204). If the process timer has timed out, the process data is switched (step S9205). Then, the process timer set value in the next process data is set in the process timer, and the process timer is started (step S9206).

If the small hit end designation command reception flag is set (that is, if the small hit end designation command is received), the effect control CPU 201 ends the effect corresponding to the small hit game, and the step S9207 Migrate to Then, the CPU 201 for effect control
The value of the background symbol process flag is updated to a value according to the background symbol variation start waiting process (step S900) (step S9207).

FIG. 57 and FIG. 58 are explanatory views showing display examples of instruction notification in the present embodiment.
The display example shown in FIG. 57 shows a display example of instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the variation of the first special symbol. For example, first, as shown in FIG. 57 (1), the background symbol corresponding to the first decorative symbol is variably displayed, and as shown in FIG. 57 (2), the background symbol is stopped and displayed with the big hit symbol. Next, as shown in FIG. 57 (3), the first normal instruction notification 55A is performed. The first normal instruction notification 55A at this time is performed by displaying an image including the character “right-handed” and the right arrow. Then, when 10 seconds have elapsed without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17, the second normal instruction notification 55B is performed as shown in FIG. 57 (4).

The second normal instruction notification 55 B at this time is a letter “Aim at the gate” and the operation gate 1
7 shows an image showing game balls passing through 7 (a square area through which the game ball is passing shows the operation gate 17 and a square area above it shows the gate 32). It will be.

The display example shown in FIG. 58 shows a display example of instruction notification in the case of a big hit based on the variation of the second special symbol in the normal state. For example, as shown in FIG. 58 (1),
The first demonstration display is performed by not performing the variation of the first special symbol despite the normal state, and the big hit variation of the second decorative symbol is performed. Then, when the variation of the first special symbol is started, as shown in FIG. 58 (2), the display under the big hit is performed and the flag under display being set is set, and then the process shown in FIG. 58 (3) The second in the jackpot symbol as shown
The change of the special symbol ends. At this time, since the flag under display in preparation is set, the first normal instruction notification 56A is issued as shown in FIG. 58 (4), and 10 seconds have passed without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17. The second normal instruction notification 5 as shown in FIG.
6B is performed. At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A and the second normal instruction notification 56B may be displayed separately in parallel, or the second normal instruction notification 5 may be displayed without displaying the first normal instruction notification 56A.
Only 6B may be displayed.

At this time, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed by displaying an image including the characters "right-handed" and the right arrow, and the second normal instruction notification 56B includes the characters "Aim at the gate" and the operation. By displaying an image showing the game ball passing through the gate 17 (a square area through which the game ball is passing shows the operation gate 17 and a square area above it shows the gate 32) To be done.

Also, as shown in FIG. 58 (6), when the variation of the second special symbol is finished in the big hit symbol without the variation of the first special symbol being performed, the first reduction as shown in FIG. 58 (7) Instruction notice 5
6C is performed, and 10 seconds pass without the game ball passing through the operation gate 17, as shown in FIG.
As shown in 8 (8), the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed.

At this time, the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed by displaying only the image indicating the character "right-handed". Further, the second reduction instruction notification 56D is performed by displaying only an image showing a character of "Aim at the gate".

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit variation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the big hit preparation display is performed when the variation of the first special symbol is performed, and the change of the first special symbol If the jackpot is not performed, the execution of the jackpot preparation display is restricted (does not be executed).

In addition, as described above, in the present embodiment, when the big hit fluctuation of the second special symbol is performed in the normal state, the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification when the first special symbol fluctuation is performed. When the change of the first special symbol is not performed, the first reduction instruction notification and the second reduction instruction notification having lower visibility than the first normal instruction notification and the second normal instruction notification are performed.

FIG. 59 is a timing chart when the big hit gaming state ends and the state is controlled to the first KT state. The timing chart shown in FIG. 59 indicates the presence or absence of control of the jackpot gaming state, the first KT
Whether the flag has been set, whether or not the normal symbol variation has been executed, whether or not the variable winning ball device 15 has been opened,
The presence or absence of the variation of the second special symbol and the presence or absence of the opening of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 are shown at each timing.

For example, while being controlled to the jackpot gaming state (before timing T0 in FIG. 59), 1.0 seconds as the variation time of the normal symbol, 0.2 seconds as the variation stop time of the normal symbol, the normal symbol hit it In this case, 2.6 seconds is set as the time before opening the variable winning ball device 15, and 0.2 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state is 1.0 seconds which is the variation time of the normal symbol and 0.2 seconds which is the symbol determination period of the normal symbol, It is 3.8 seconds obtained by adding 2.6 seconds, which is the time before opening the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, while being controlled to the big hit game state, the variation control of the special symbol and the opening control of the special variable winning a prize ball device 22 are not executed.

Furthermore, while being controlled to the first KT state (after timing T0 in FIG. 59), 0.2 seconds is the normal symbol variation time, 0.2 seconds is the normal symbol variation stop time, and the normal symbol is hit In this case, 0.1 second is set as the time before opening of the variable winning ball device 15, and 5.5 seconds is set as the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit gaming state is a normal symbol variation time of 0. 0.
It is 0.5 seconds obtained by adding 2 seconds, 0.2 seconds which is a symbol determination period of a normal symbol, and 0.1 second which is a time before opening of the variable winning ball device 15. In addition, after being controlled to the first KT state, 7.0 seconds is the first variation time of the second special symbol, and the special variable winning ball device 22 at the time of small hit
Of 0.8 seconds as the opening time of, and 1.0 seconds as the fluctuation time of the second special symbol from the second time onward after being controlled to the first KT state (it is assumed that the second number of pending storages 1 1) It is set.

At this time, the closing period of the variable winning ball device 15 while being controlled to the big hit game state (3.
The first special symbol fluctuation time (7.0) after being controlled to the first KT state rather than 8 seconds)
The second is longer. This is, for example, the variable winning ball device 1 immediately before the timing T0.
It is assumed that the variable winning ball device 15 is closed for a maximum of 2.6 seconds when the standby before the release of 5 is started, and temporarily controlled to the first KT state and then the first second special If the variation time of the symbol is too short, the special variable winning ball device 22 is controlled to the open state while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed, and the special variable winning ball device is in the first KT state 2
It is conceivable that the game ball wins in 2. Therefore, while the variable winning ball device 15 is closed and controlled, the variation time of the second special symbol is extended so that the special variable winning ball device 22 is not opened and controlled.

As described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of executing a game using a gaming medium (in this example, gaming balls), and a predetermined path of the flow-down path through which the gaming medium flows (In this example, provided in the right of the game area 7), a specific area (in this example, the operation gate 17) through which game media can pass, and a predetermined condition (in this example, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed) Can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the passage of game media through the specific area (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560). Steps S305 to S307, S when Y in step S2501
The portion executing 355 to S357) can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state in this example) which is advantageous for the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, steps in microcomputer 560 for game control) S358 to S360)) can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased more than the normal state (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560) Steps S2208A, S
2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S2214B), execute a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a first instruction notification) that promotes the discharge of gaming media to a predetermined path based on the establishment of a predetermined condition It is possible to execute a specific promotion notification (in the present example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the emission of gaming media to a specific area after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. (In this example, the portion for executing steps S4404, S4405, S4604, and S4605 in the effect control microcomputer 200). As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control to a state in which the small hit is likely to be smaller than the normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying the big hit symbol indicating that it is a big hit) The game machine which controls to the advantageous state (big hit game state) when the game medium passes after the specific area as a trigger is described, and in the game machine, it is appropriate to notify the trigger to control the advantageous state. Although it is preferable, there is a risk that the effect may be complicated if notification is given to urge the game medium to be discharged to the specific area each time a predetermined condition is satisfied. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

For example, when the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed in the second special symbol after transitioning to the normal state after the KT state ends, the variation time of the second special symbol in the normal state is long, so the second special symbol It is assumed that the player is away from the seat for reasons such as a break without waiting for the change of. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to control not to be in the big hit gaming state during the break by appropriately notifying the trigger to control to the big hit gaming state.

Also, unlike the above-described gaming machine, there is a gaming machine configured to be controlled to the big hit gaming state on condition that the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed regardless of whether the gaming ball passes through the operation gate 17 or not. The player stands by until the big hit gaming state is started (until the big winning opening is opened) after the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed for the purpose of suppressing wasted hits of the game balls, and then the game balls are launched Have to do. Such a player also similarly changes the jackpot symbol from the stop display of the game ball until the jackpot game state is started even in the gaming machine which shifts to the big hit game state on condition that the game ball passes the operation gate 17 It may try to wait for launch, in which case the big hit gaming state will not be started. Therefore, with the above-described configuration, it is possible to appropriately notify such a player of an opportunity to control to the big hit gaming state.

In addition, specific examples of the predetermined prompting notification and the specific prompting notification are not limited to those described above. Specifically, effect members other than the effect display device 9 (for example, the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9)
A presentation using a light emitting member such as a decorative LED or the like may be used as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification. Further, effects may be performed using a plurality of effect members as the predetermined promotion notification and the specific promotion notification. Further, the effect members used as the predetermined prompting notification and the specific prompting notification may be different from each other. For example, in the predetermined promotion notification, the game effect lamp 9 is made to emit light,
In the specific promotion notification, a predetermined screen may be displayed on the effect display device 9.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in the present example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) which can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, game control) Step S2015X and the second special symbol stop process in the microcomputer 560 for performing the same process as step S2015X), it is possible to externally output the advantageous state signal based on the establishment of the predetermined condition (in this example, Microcomputer 560 for game control is step S25 in the first special symbol stop processing and the second special symbol stop processing.
It is assumed that step S2015X is executed before 01 is executed. In this way, it is possible to notify the gaming staff that the unmanned gaming machine without a player has become advantageous.
The initialization of the gaming machine can be promoted.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when a predetermined condition is satisfied when the power of the gaming machine is turned on, it may be possible to notify of that (in this example, the game control) The microcomputer ball 560 displays the jackpot symbol and then the game ball is operated.
When the power is turned off before passing through 7, the information on the current situation (the situation waiting for the passage of the gaming ball to the actuation gate 17) (in this example, corresponds to the first gate passing waiting process) The special symbol process flag value "8") is backed up, and when the information is backed up at the time of power on, the predetermined command is microcomputer for effect control 20
Transmitting to 0, the effect control microcomputer 200 notifies the establishment of the predetermined condition by executing the first instruction notification, the second instruction notification, or an effect that can be executed only when the power is turned on when the predetermined command is received. May be Thereby, an opportunity to control to an advantageous state can be notified appropriately.

Further, although the description has been omitted in this embodiment, it may be possible to execute the specific promotion notification in a manner different depending on the situation where the predetermined condition is satisfied (in this example, the effect control microcomputer The second instruction notification may be executed in a mode different depending on the type of jackpot to be played or the game state). As a result, an opportunity to control to an advantageous state can be appropriately notified according to the situation.

Specifically, when the variation is performed using a variation pattern dedicated to the big hit, a battle effect in which an ally character and an enemy character are confronted is performed as an effect during variation, and the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed before the outcome of the confrontation is shown. At the same time, "Aim for the gate" is displayed, and in the subsequent big hit gaming state, the battle production is continued as a big hit production (that is, the fluctuation production and the big hit production become a series of battle effects) Good. At that time, win the battle if it is a big hit of the advantageous type (for example, a big hit with a large number of rounds, a big hit with a long opening period of the big winning opening, a big hit moving to a definite change state, a big hit moving to a KT state) , As a big hit of the disadvantage type (for example, a big hit with a small number of rounds, a big hit with a short opening period of a big winning opening, a big hit without transition to a definite change state, a big hit not transitioning to a KT state) It is also good.

Moreover, although description is abbreviate | omitted in this embodiment, the variable display of 1st identification information (this example 1st special symbol) and the variable display of 2nd identification information (this example 2nd special symbol) are performed. (In this example, steps S26A and S2 in the game control microcomputer 560).
6B), variable display of first effect identification information (in this example, the first decorative symbol) corresponding to variable display of the first identification information is performed to derive and display the display result; Second effect identification information (in this example, corresponding to variable display of 2 identification information (in this example, the second special symbol)
It is possible to perform variable display of the second decorative symbol) and derive and display the display result (in this example, a portion that executes steps S705A and S705B in the effect control microcomputer 200), and in the normal state, the second effect The variable display of the identification information may be difficult to visually recognize, and the display result of the variable display of the second effect identification information may be easily visually recognized (in this example, in the normal state, the microcomputer 200 for effect control) (2) The second decorative symbol may be erased while the special symbol changes, and the second decorative symbol may be displayed when the second special symbol is stopped. Thereby, the variable display of the first identification information can be focused on in the normal state.

Further, in the normal state, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display result of the variation of the second decorative symbol and the display regarding the second reserved storage number.

In addition, it is a concept including not being able to visually recognize and being hard to visually recognize being hard to visually recognize.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, a game machine capable of executing a game using a game medium (in this example, a game ball), which is a specific area (the game medium can pass through) In this example, the operation gate 17) and the variable display of the first identification information (in the present example, the first special symbol) and the second
Variable display of identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be performed, and the first identification information and the second identification can be performed during execution of variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information. It is possible to execute the other variable display of the information (in this example, the microcomputer 5 for game control)
By performing steps S26A and S26B at 60, the portion in which the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel), predetermined conditions (in this example,
After the jackpot symbol is stopped and displayed, control can be made to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) which is advantageous for the player based on the passage of gaming media through the specific area (in this example, , Y in step S 2501 in the microcomputer 560 for game control
(Steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 are executed), and can be controlled to a predetermined state (small hit game state in this example) which is advantageous for the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, , Step S35 in the game control microcomputer 560
8 to S360), it can be controlled to a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased more than the normal state (in this example, in the game control microcomputer 560) Steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B
, S2213 B, and S2214 B), based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition, it is possible to execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, a second instruction notification) for promoting the emission of gaming media to the specific area (in this example, In this example, the step S4 in the effect control microcomputer 200 is performed.
604, a portion executing S4605), when not satisfying the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player (in this example, not performing the variation of the first special symbol despite the normal state) Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information, the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example, the second normal instruction notification is performed), and the absence condition is satisfied. Based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information.
The specific promotion notification is performed in a special mode whose visibility is lower than that of the predetermined mode (in this example, a second reduction instruction notification is performed). Thereby, in consideration of the establishment of the absence condition, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific area.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control to a state in which the small hit is likely to be smaller than the normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying the big hit symbol indicating that it is a big hit) is satisfied. The game machine which controls to an advantageous state (big hit game state) when a game medium passes after a specific area as a trigger is described, but in this game machine, it promotes the discharge of the game medium to the specific area There was a possibility that the specific promotion notification could not be properly performed. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately perform the specific promotion notification for promoting the emission of the game medium to the specific area in consideration of the establishment of the absence condition.

For example, if it is a gaming machine that performs the second normal instruction notification (notification in all of the display area of the effect display device 9) even if the absence condition is satisfied (when the player is not present), When the final player who has played a game has already finished playing the game, but the final player has temporarily left the seat, and played the game of the gaming machine. It may be considered that a new player will refrain from playing a game with this gaming machine, thinking that it may develop into trouble. Therefore, as in the gaming machine shown in the present embodiment, by performing the specific promotion notification in a mode according to the situation, it is possible to eliminate the indifference of a new player and promote the operation of the gaming machine. be able to.

In addition, there is a person who tries to enjoy an advantageous situation (big hit gaming state) generated based on a game by a player who has finished the game, and if such an action is performed, the game lacks in fairness. It becomes. Therefore, as described in the present embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied (when the player is not present), the special mode whose visibility is lower than when the absence condition is not satisfied (when the player is present) By executing the specific promotion notification, it is possible to make it difficult to be recognized that the stage is in the advantageous situation, and the fairness of the game can be secured.

In the present embodiment, it is considered as "a condition of absence" that the first special symbol is not to be changed despite being in the normal state (correctly, the first special symbol is started to change in the normal state) Not considered to meet the absence condition), but it is not limited thereto. For example, the player does not touch the bat operating handle (operation knob) 5 or any of the areas (the operation gate 17, the gate 32, the first start winning opening 13, the second start winning opening 14, the special winning opening, Not detecting the passage of the game ball to the special winning opening 24) for a predetermined period of time may be regarded as an "absent condition". Further, for example, the absence condition may be set such that the start winning combination does not occur until a predetermined period (for example, 2 minutes) elapses after the reception waiting demonstration specification command is received.

Further, according to this embodiment, when the absence condition is satisfied, the absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied regardless of whether or not the specific promotion notification is performed in the predetermined mode (in this example, , And the first demonstration display) (in this example, a portion for executing step S4716 in the effect control microcomputer 200). Thereby, it is possible to appropriately prompt the player to play a game.

Although the description is omitted in the present embodiment, it is controlled to a power saving state in which the consumed power is reduced on condition that a predetermined period (for example, 10 minutes) has elapsed since the start of the demonstration display. It may be In the power saving state, each effect member is consumed by reducing the volume output from the speaker 27, reducing the luminance of the image display device 5, and reducing the light amount of the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED. Power is reduced.

Further, according to this embodiment, the execution of the effect is controlled based on the game control means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560) for controlling the progress of the game and the information transmitted from the game control means. Effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200
, And the game control means is configured to display, based on the first identification information, first absence information (in this example, a first customer wait demo display specification command) indicating whether or not an absence condition is established. It is possible to transmit the second absence information (in this example, a second customer wait demo display designation command) indicating whether the absence condition is established based on the identification information (in this example, the game control microcomputer A portion to execute steps S51A and S51B in 560). By this,
It is possible to execute appropriate rendition according to the situation.

In the present embodiment, whether the absence condition is established based on the first customer waiting demo display designating command indicating whether the absence condition is established based on the first special symbol and the second special symbol Although it was decided to separately provide the second customer waiting demo display designating command indicating whether or not it is not limited to this, the command indicating whether the absence condition is established based on the first special symbol, A common command may be provided as a command indicating whether or not the absence condition is established based on the second special symbol. For example, in the normal state
When the change of the first special symbol is not performed in the state where the pending storage is not stored (sends the common command regardless of the presence of the variation of the second special symbol and the presence of the second pending storage) , In the KT state, when the second special storage is not stored and the second special symbol is not changed (regardless of the presence of the first special symbol or the presence of the first storage) A common command may be sent.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game control means includes game control means for controlling the progress of the game, and effect control means for controlling the execution of the effect based on the information transmitted from the game control means. Special state control information (in this example, a background designation command) indicating whether or not the special state is controlled, and absence information (in this example, the first customer waiting demo display) indicating whether or not an absence condition is established It is possible to transmit a designated command and a second customer wait demo display designated command) (in this example, steps S51A, S51B, and S60 in the game control microcomputer 560).
A, a part that executes S60B), the effect control means can execute an absence effect indicating that the absence condition is satisfied based on the special state control information and the absence information (in this example, micro for effect control) In step S4502 of the computer 200, it is determined that the customer waiting demo display can be executed based on the background specifying command and the customer waiting demo display specifying command. In this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate presentation according to the situation.

Further, according to this embodiment, information indicating whether to control in the advantageous state based on the variable display of the second identification information can be stored as the pending storage (in this example, the second pending storage). It is possible to execute an advantageous notification effect (in the present example, a big hit effect) indicating a control (in the present example, the second hold storage buffer) and controlling to an advantageous state (in the present example, the microcomputer 200 for effect control). During execution of the steps S904 to S907 in FIG. 5), during the variable display of the first identification information controlled to the advantageous state, the variable display of the second identification information corresponding to the pending storage indicating the control to the advantageous state is started If it is determined, the advantageous notification effect corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is not executed (in this example, the microcomputer 560 for game control performs step S).
By not performing the process after step S65B in the case of Y of 64BB, even if the big hit random number is stored as the second pending storage, the fluctuation with respect to the second pending storage is forcibly excluded, and the effect is The control microcomputer 200 does not execute the jackpot effect regarding the second identification information). In this way, it is possible to execute an appropriate presentation according to the situation.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine capable of executing a game, wherein the variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and the second identification information (In this example, it is possible to execute variable display of the second special symbol), and during execution of variable display of either one of the first identification information and the second identification information The other variable display can be executed (in this example, by executing steps S26A and S26B in microcomputer 560 for game control, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol are made parallel Specific display result (in this example, the jackpot symbol) as a display result of either one of the variable display of the first identification information and the variable display of the second identification information).
Can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) advantageous to the player based on the derived display of the step (in this example, steps S305 to S307 and S355 to S357 in the game control microcomputer 560). Part), the variable display of the first identification information, and the variable display of the second identification information, based on the predetermined display result (in this example, the small hit symbol) being derived and displayed. It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state in this example) which is advantageous for the player and different from the advantageous state (in this example, a portion executing steps S358 to S360 in microcomputer 560 for game control) It can be controlled to a special state (in this example, KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased more than the normal state (in this example, , Step S2208A in the gaming control microcomputer 560, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, S221
4B can be performed, and notification effects (in this example, a big hit preparation display) to notify that a predetermined condition is satisfied can be executed (in this example, step S5003 in the effect control microcomputer 200 is executed) Partially, when the absence condition corresponding to the absence of the player in the normal state is not satisfied, the variable effect display of the second identification information can execute the notification effect based on the satisfaction of the predetermined condition. In the example, the microcomputer 200 for effect control is S in the case where Y in step S5000, Y in S5001 and Y in S5002 are used.
And 5003 is performed), the execution of the informing effect is restricted based on the fact that the predetermined condition is satisfied by the variable display of the second identification information when the absence condition is satisfied in the normal state (in this example, for effect control) The microcomputer 200 executes Y in step S5000 and Y in S5001.
, S5002 is not performed in the case of N of S5002). Accordingly, in consideration of the satisfaction of the absence condition, notification that the predetermined condition is satisfied can be appropriately performed.

For example, in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-202287, it is possible to control to a state in which the small hit is likely to be smaller than the normal state, and a predetermined condition (for example, stopping and displaying the big hit symbol indicating that it is a big hit) is satisfied. The game machine which controls to the advantageous state (big hit game state) with the opportunity that game media pass after the specific area is described, but in this game machine, the notification that the predetermined condition is met is appropriately done in the game machine. There was a risk that it could not be done. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, it is possible to appropriately notify that the predetermined condition is established, taking into consideration that the absence condition is established.

Note that "restricting execution" is not performed as in the present embodiment or performed in a mode that is difficult to recognize (for example, notification effect is performed using an image smaller than usual or an image with a low density) Or a notification effect of outputting a sound at a volume lower than normal.

Moreover, about the specific example of alerting | reporting production, it is not restricted to what was mentioned above. Specifically, the effect using the effect members (for example, light emitting members such as the speaker 27, the game effect lamp 9 and the decorative LED) other than the effect display device 9 may be used as the notification effect. In addition, effects may be performed using a plurality of effect members as the informing effect.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, it is a gaming machine that can be controlled to an advantageous state (in this example, a big hit gaming state) that is advantageous to the player, and a game medium (in this example) Variable starting device (in this example) that can be changed to an entry advantage state (in this example, the open state) in which the game ball can enter and an entry disadvantage state (in this example, the closed state) , A variable winning ball device 15), and a predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22 in the present embodiment) provided downstream of the variable starting device and capable of changing to an entering advantageous state and an entering disadvantageous state; The variable start device can be controlled to change to an entering advantageous state or an entering disadvantageous state (in this example, a portion for executing step S5103 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), and the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) Variable table of) The variable display of the second identification information (in this example, the second special symbol) can be performed based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable start device (in this example, for game control). Step S26A in the microcomputer 560
, S26 B), holding storage means capable of storing information on variable display of the second identification information as holding storage (in the present example, second holding storage) (in the present example, second holding storage buffer)
Based on the display result of either the variable display of the first identification information or the variable display of the second identification information being a predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol), It can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) to be changed to the entry advantageous state (in this example, a portion executing step S358 to S360 in the gaming control microcomputer 560) It is possible to control to a special state (in this example, KT state) in which the frequency controlled to the state is increased (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S2210B, S2213B in microcomputer 560 for game control)
, S2214 B) as a special state, the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example) and the second special state (high in this example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state Controlable to probability / second KT state), and controlled to an advantageous state, changes control of the variable start device to entry adverse state over a specified period longer than that controlled to the first special state (In this example, step S2 in microcomputer 560 for game control
By executing 6C, as shown in FIG. 59, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the big hit gaming state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is set to 0 in the first KT state.
. Variable indication of the first period controlled as the first special state, and variable indication of the first period regardless of the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means) Can be executed (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state, and the first change is changed using the change pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. 14 (G) By determining the pattern, it is possible to execute the variation of the second special symbol for 7.0 seconds regardless of the number of reserved memories), and it is controlled to the first special state and the second and subsequent second
As the variable display of the identification information, when the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means in the first special state is equal to or more than a predetermined number, it is possible to perform variable display of a second period shorter than the first period ( In this example, the game control microcomputer 560 is controlled to the first KT state and 2
For the second and subsequent fluctuations, if the second reserved memory count is 1 or more by determining the fluctuation pattern using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (E) or FIG. 14 (H), 1.0 second (1 K
It is controlled to T state, and it is possible to execute the fluctuation of the second special symbol over the first fluctuation time of less than 7.0 seconds). Thereby, the interest in the special state can be improved.

For example, JP-A-2015-156952 includes a variable start device (attacker) that can change between an entry advantage state where game media can enter and an entry advantage state where game media can not enter or that is difficult. A gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an entry advantage state in a state, which can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency at which a small hit gaming state is controlled is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an entry disadvantage state By delaying game balls flowing down on the predetermined variable device, game media can easily enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit gaming state, and a gaming machine is described in which the degree of advantage in the special state is increased. However, in the gaming machine, the gameplay in the special state is monotonous and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the interest in the special state can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, when controlled to the first KT state, although the frequency of the small hit is high, the inside of the special variable winning ball device 22 is actually increased by prolonging the opening time of the variable winning ball device 15. Is set to rarely win in the special winning opening 24, but in the state immediately after the transition to the low probability / first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22
There is a possibility that a certain amount of gaming balls are accumulated on the bottom of the base member, and if the special variable winning winning ball device 22 is immediately controlled to be in the open state, a considerable number of gaming balls win the special winning opening 24 There is a possibility of Therefore, in the first fluctuation of the first KT state, by securing a fluctuation time of at least 7 seconds, it accumulates on the bottom surface member of the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 before shifting to the first KT state. More than expected in the first KT state by controlling the special variable winning prize ball device 22 to the open state and enabling the special winning hole 24 to be won after a sufficient time has elapsed before all the game balls fall. It prevents that the situation that can get the prize ball is generated.

Also, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided,
The entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined variable device (special variable winning prize ball device 22) in a part of the special states (first KT state) can be suppressed. Therefore, the part of the special states (the first KT state) can be made into special states with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize different degrees of advantages of a plurality of special states.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the variable display of the first second identification information controlled to the first special state, the first variable state is longer than the specific period regardless of the number of pending storages stored in the pending storage means. Variable display of one period can be executed (in this example, the microcomputer 5 for game control)
60 is controlled to the first KT state, and in the first fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13 (D) or FIG. The second special symbol fluctuation can be executed over a second (a time longer than 3.8 seconds for the closing time of the variable winning ball device 15 in the big hit gaming state), controlled to the first special state 2
As the variable display of the second identification information from the first time onward, variable display of the second period shorter than the specific period is performed if the number of pending storages stored in the hold storage means in the first special state is equal to or greater than the predetermined number. Yes (in this example, the microcomputer 560 for gaming control is controlled to the first KT state, and the second and subsequent fluctuations are performed using the fluctuation pattern table shown in FIG. 13E or FIG. 14H). Of the second special symbol over 1.0 seconds (a time shorter than 3.8 seconds for the variable winning ball device 15 in the big hit gaming state) if the second reserved memory number is 1 or more by determining the Fluctuation is feasible). Thereby, the interest in the special state can be improved.

Further, although the description is omitted in this embodiment, when being controlled to the second special state, the hold is performed regardless of how many times the second identification information is variably displayed after being controlled to the second special state. The variable display of the second identification information may be executed at different fluctuation times based on the number of pending storages stored in the storage means (in this example, the microcomputer 560 for game control)
Is the second special symbol in the second KT state, regardless of the number of changes performed after being controlled to the second KT state, if the second pending storage number is 1 or more over the second The special symbol may be changed, and the second special symbol may be changed over 3 seconds if the second reserved memory number is zero. ). Thereby, the interest in the special state can be improved.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the variable display of the identification information (in this example, the first special symbol and the second special symbol) is performed, and an advantageous state (this example) which is advantageous for the player Then,
It is a gaming machine that can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state, and a special area (in this example, the gate 32) through which gaming media (in this example, gaming balls) can pass, and an entering advantageous state (in which gaming media can enter) In this example, a variable starting device (in this example, variable winning ball device 15) capable of changing between an open state and an entry disadvantage state (in this example, a closed state) in which game media can not enter or difficult to enter. A predetermined variable device (in this example, a special variable winning ball device 22 in the present example) provided downstream of the device and capable of changing into an entry advantageous state and an entry disadvantageous state, and based on the game medium passing through the special area It is possible to execute variable display of the ordinary identification information (in this example, the ordinary symbol) (in this example, a portion for executing the steps S5100 to S5102 in the gaming control microcomputer 560), and also for the variable display of the ordinary identification information. Tosu Variable start device can be changed to the entry advantage state (in this example, the part that executes step S5103 in the game control microcomputer 560), and identification based on the fact that the game medium has entered the variable start device It is possible to execute variable display of information (in this example, the part that executes step S26B in microcomputer 560 for game control), the display result of the variable display of identification information is a predetermined display result (in this example, small hit symbol) It is possible to control to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state in this example) that changes the predetermined variable device to the entry advantageous state based on the fact that the step S358 ~ A part that executes S360), a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to a predetermined state is increased It is controllable (in this example,
Steps S2208A and S2211A in the game control microcomputer 560
Parts that execute S2209B, S2210B, S2213B, and S2214B) As the special states, the first special state (in this example, high probability / the first KT state) and the second special state (which is more advantageous than the first special state) In this example, it is possible to control with high probability / second KT state), and in the first special state, gaming media that has passed the special area when the variable display of the ordinary identification information is not performed enters the variable starting device The variable start device is controlled so as to be possible (in this example, the shortest required time for the game ball to pass through the gate 32 to reach the variable winning ball device 15 is 0. 0).
It is 6 seconds, and in the first KT state, by controlling the variable winning ball device 15 in the open state 0.5 seconds after the gaming ball passes the gate 32, one gaming ball in the first KT state is the gate 32 When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state when it passes, the one game ball can be won by the variable winning ball device 15 as it is. Thereby, the interest in the special state can be improved.

For example, JP-A-2015-156952 includes a variable start device (attacker) that can change between an entry advantage state where game media can enter and an entry advantage state where game media can not enter or that is difficult. A gaming machine that changes a predetermined variable device to an entry advantage state in a state, which can be controlled to a special state in which the frequency at which a small hit gaming state is controlled is increased, and the predetermined variable device is controlled to an entry disadvantage state By delaying game balls flowing down on the predetermined variable device, game media can easily enter the predetermined variable device in the small hit gaming state, and a gaming machine is described in which the degree of advantage in the special state is increased. However, in the gaming machine, the gameplay in the special state is monotonous and the interest is insufficient. Therefore, by configuring as in the present embodiment, the interest in the special state can be improved.

For example, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 15, in the first KT state, the fluctuation time of the symbol is normally set to a short time of 0.2 seconds. This is because, for example, when the second special symbol variation display with a relatively long variation time is executed in the first KT state, the variable winning ball is in a state in which the normal symbol is stopped changing and there is no normal symbol storage This is because the device 15 is in the closed state, and capture targeting the variation stop timing of the second special symbol becomes possible (
When it becomes a small hit, the variable winning ball device 15 does not open until the gaming ball which has passed the gate 32 reaches the variable winning ball device 15 or the special variable winning ball device 22 if the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is long , Special winning opening 24 will be possible)). On the other hand, in this embodiment, by shortening the variation time of the normal symbol, the variable winning ball device 15 is opened before the gaming ball passes the gate 32 and reaches the variable winning ball device 15. Since it is set to be started, it is possible to eliminate the capture element by the launch operation aiming at the small hit occurrence timing based on the variation display of the second special symbol in the first KT state.

Also, when a plurality of special states (first KT state, second KT state) are provided,
The entry of the gaming ball into the predetermined variable device (special variable winning prize ball device 22) in a part of the special states (first KT state) can be suppressed. Therefore, the part of the special states (the first KT state) can be made into special states with a low degree of advantage, and it is possible to realize different degrees of advantages of a plurality of special states.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the second special state, the variable start device is controlled to the entry disadvantageous state over a period longer than the first special state (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 As shown in FIG. 15 (1), in the first KT state, the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 0.5 seconds, and as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 1 is in the second KT state.
Control the closed state for 5 seconds for 3.8 seconds), and the variable start device is made so that the game medium which has passed the special area becomes difficult to enter the variable start device when the variable display of the identification information is not performed. (In this example, the shortest required time for the game ball to pass through the gate 32 to reach the variable winning ball device 15 is 0.6 seconds, and the game ball flows down on the variable winning ball device 15) Time is 0.5 seconds, and the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the second KT state, so that one gaming ball passes the gate 32 in the second KT state. When the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state, the one game ball is the variable winning ball device 1 as it is
It is difficult to win 5). This makes it easy to give the player a profit in the second special state.

In the present embodiment, the second KT state has a longer variation time of the symbol than the first KT state, so that the second KT state has a variable winning over a longer period than the first KT state. Although the control of the ball device 15 in the closed state is realized, the control of the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state over a longer period of time in the second KT state than in the first KT state by other control May be realized.

For example, closing the variable winning ball device 15 over a longer period in the second KT state than in the first KT state by configuring the second KT state to be longer than the first KT state. Control to the state may be realized.

Also, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, the waiting time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the open state when the second KT state is normal hit than the first KT state as shown in the present embodiment ( By setting the time before the opening of the ordinary motorized part shown in FIG. 38 to be long, it is possible to control the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state for a longer period in the second KT state than in the first KT state You may

In addition, combining the adjustment time of the normal symbol fluctuation time mentioned above, the symbol decision time of the normal symbol, and the standby time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit is combined By doing this, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the closed state for a longer period of time in the second KT state than in the first KT state.

Further, according to this embodiment, in the normal state, the variable start device is controlled to the entry disadvantageous state over a period longer than the first special state (in this example, the microcomputer 56 for game control).
0 controls the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state for 0.5 seconds in the first KT state as shown in FIG. 15 (1), and in the normal state, the variable winning ball device 15 is 3 as in the second KT state. Control the variable start device so that game media which has passed the special area are difficult to enter the variable start device when the variable display of the identification information is not performed, while the closed state is controlled for 8 seconds). In this example, the shortest required time for the game ball to reach the variable winning ball device 15 after passing through the gate 32 is 0.6 seconds, and the time for the game ball to flow over the variable winning ball device 15 Since the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be closed for 3.8 seconds in the normal state in 0.5 seconds, the variable winning ball device 15 in the normal state when one gaming ball passes the gate 32. Is controlled to the open state, Game ball has become difficult winning the variable winning ball device 15 as it is). As a result, the game medium is launched to aim at the special area in the normal state.
It is possible to prevent the right strike.

In the present embodiment, the variable symbol ball device in the normal state is longer in the normal state than in the first KT state by configuring the variation time of the symbol to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state. Although the control of the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state is realized, the control of the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state is realized by the other control over a longer period of time than the first KT state. May be

For example, the variable winning ball device 15 is closed over a longer period in the normal state than in the first KT state by configuring the symbol determination time for the normal pattern to be longer in the normal state than in the first KT state. Control may be realized.

Also, for example, as shown in the present embodiment, the standby state before the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit in the normal state than in the first KT state (see FIG. By setting the time before the opening of the normal motorized part shown in 38) to be long, the normal state is more
It may be realized to control the variable winning ball device 15 in the closed state over a period longer than the KT state.

In addition, combining the adjustment time of the normal symbol fluctuation time mentioned above, the symbol decision time of the normal symbol, and the standby time until the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to the open state when the normal symbol is a hit is combined By doing this, it may be realized that the variable winning ball device 15 is controlled to be in the closed state for a longer period of time in the normal state than in the first KT state.

In this embodiment, although it was considered as composition which can not be controlled to a small hit game state based on change of the 1st special symbol, it is not restricted to this, and the 1st special symbol stopped and displayed with a small hit symbol It is good also as composition which can be controlled to a small hit game state based on a thing. In that case, when the variation of the second special symbol is started when the small hit variation of the first special symbol is performed, the second
The special symbol may be forcibly removed.

In addition, in the present embodiment, when the second special symbol variation is executed, it is configured to be a big hit or a small hit (not to be a normal drop) except in the case of forced removal.
The present invention is not limited to this, and even when the second special symbol is changed, it may be a normal disconnection. For example, when the small hit ratio is 1⁄2, it can be deviated, and when the small hit is continuous (the second small hit fluctuation without the big hit fluctuation or the outlier fluctuation being performed after the first small hit fluctuation Special effects that are not performed when the small hit is not continuous (when the next variation of the small hit is a big hit or break) (for example, an effect that notifies that the small hit is continuous) May be performed.

Further, as described above, according to this embodiment, the entry advantageous state (in the present example, the open state) to which the game medium (in this example, the game ball) can enter and the game medium can not enter or is difficult Variable start device (in the present example, the variable winning ball device 15) capable of changing into various entry disadvantageous states (in the present state, the closed state), and provided on the downstream side of the variable starter, And a predetermined variable device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 22 in the present embodiment), and the variable starting device can be controlled by any one of a plurality of opening patterns (see FIG. 15). .
In addition, variable display can be performed based on the game medium entering the variable start device,
Based on the fact that the display result of the variable display has become the predetermined display result (in this example, a small hit symbol in this example), the predetermined variable device is changed to the entering advantageous state and controlled to a predetermined state (in the present example, small hit gaming state) It is possible to control to a special state (in this example, KT state) in which the frequency of being controlled to the predetermined state is increased. Also, as a special state, a second special state (high probability / second K in this example) in which the first special state has a different degree of advantage from the first special state (high probability / first KT state in this example)
T state) and can be controlled. The variable start device can be controlled by the specific opening pattern at different rates depending on whether it is controlled to the first special state or to the second special state (in this example, in the first KT state) As shown in FIG. 15 (1), the variable winning ball device 15 is opened for 5.5 seconds, and in the second KT state, as shown in FIG. 15 (2), the variable winning ball device 15 is only 0.2 seconds. Open). Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the monotony of the gameplay in the special state, and to improve the interest of the game when controlling to the special state.

In this embodiment, the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 5.5 seconds in the first KT state, and the variable winning ball device 15 is always opened for 0.2 seconds in the second KT state. It is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened for 0.2 seconds with a low probability even in the first KT state, or the variable winning ball device 15 may be opened with a low probability even in the second KT state. It may be configured to be open for 5 seconds. It is sufficient that at least the second KT state is configured such that the ratio of the short winning opening of the variable winning ball device 15 is higher.

Further, according to this embodiment, a plurality of types of advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation big hit,
It can be controlled to 6R probability variation big hit, 6R normal big hit, 2R probability big hit, 2R normal big hit), and the second special status has higher advantage compared to the first special status (in this example, it is small in the first KT status) It is rare for the game ball to win a special winning opening 24 in a hit game, but in the second KT state, the game ball can win a special winning opening 24 in a small hit game). In addition, it is possible to control to the second special state according to the type of the advantageous state (in this example, it is shifted to the high probability / second KT state after the end of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit). Therefore, by associating the type of the advantageous state with the type of the special state, it can be noticed which type of the advantageous state will be obtained.

In addition, depending on the type of the big hit, it may be configured to execute different effects during the big hit game. With such a configuration, it is possible to pay attention to which effect is executed during the big hit game.

Further, according to this embodiment, at least a part of the effects are taken over by the period controlled to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) and the period controlled to the second special state. In this example, the sound output of the music for the second KT is started at the start of the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit, and the sound output of the music for the second KT is continued until the second KT state is ended. ). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game by impressing the player that the control is in the second special state.

Although this embodiment shows the case where the sound output of the music is taken over from the big hit game based on the 16R probability variation big hit that triggers the second KT state to the second KT state thereafter, the present invention is not limited to such an aspect, For example, a moving image may be taken over and displayed, a round number display may be taken over and displayed, or a winning ball number display may be handed over and displayed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is provided on the upstream side of the variable starting device, and is provided with a specific variable device (in this example, the special variable winning ball device 20) capable of changing into an entering advantageous state and an entering disadvantageous state
It is controllable to the advantageous state (in this example, the big hit gaming state) which changes the specific variable device to the entering advantageous state. Also, it is determined whether or not the variable start device is controlled to be in the entry advantageous state (in this example, whether or not per drawing), and the variable start device is controlled to be in the entry advantageous state by the same ratio regardless of the state. (In this example, in the normal symbol process process (step S26C), whether the gaming state is a definite change state (high probability state) or not, the non-KT state, the first KT state or the second KT state Regardless of whether it is a jackpot gaming state or not, it is determined whether or not per common drawing with the same probability). Therefore, with regard to the entry of gaming media into the specific variable device, the duration of the advantageous state can be shortened because the variable start device that can be controlled to enter the advantageous state can not be influenced during the advantageous state. It is possible to suppress the decrease in interest for the game.

Further, according to this embodiment, after being controlled to the advantageous state, it can be controlled to the special state (in the present example, a positive change state), and is the same as the first special state (in the present example, high probability / first KT state) Control can be made to the third special state (in this example, low probability / first KT state) in which the release pattern is selected by the ratio, the variable start device is controlled, and the variable display pattern is selected by the different ratio to perform variable display. It is. And, if it is not controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state, it is possible to control to the third special state (in this example, after the big hit game end based on 6R normal big hit or 2R normal big hit, low probability / first KT Transition to state). Therefore, it is possible to give an opportunity for the player to be discouraged from ending the game when it is not controlled to the special state after being controlled to the advantageous state.

Further, according to this embodiment, the variable start device and the predetermined variable device are provided with the delay means (in this example, the restriction piece 118) for delaying the flow of the game medium. for that reason,
By providing the delay means, the flow-down speed of gaming media can be delayed, and in the first special state, the entering ratio of gaming media to the variable start device can be further increased, and in the second special status, to the predetermined variable device The entry rate of game media can be further enhanced.

Moreover, according to this embodiment, it is possible to execute variable display of the first identification information (in this example, the first special symbol) and variable display of the second identification information (in the present example, the second special symbol) With
It is possible to execute the other variable display of the first identification information and the second identification information during the execution of the variable display of any one of the first identification information and the second identification information (in this example, the variation of the first special symbol) The display and the variable display of the second special symbol can be performed in parallel). Also, in the predetermined state (in this example,
It is possible to determine whether or not to control to the small hitting gaming state), to determine the variable display time (in this example, the fluctuation time), and to execute the variable display of the second identification information. It is possible to decide to control to a predetermined state at a high rate compared to when 1 variable display of identification information is performed (in this example, it is considered as a small hit only when performing variable display of the second special symbol) Determinable). When the special state is controlled, a short time can be determined as the variable display time of the variable display of the second identification information as compared with the case where the special state is controlled (in this example, As shown in FIG. 13 (C), as shown in FIG. 13 (D) to FIG. 14 (I), while the variation time of the second special symbol is 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state as shown in FIG. 13 (C) In KT state, the variation time of the second special symbol is 1.5 seconds to 2 minutes 20 seconds). Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest in the game in the gaming machine controlled to the special state.

In this embodiment, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol can be executed in parallel, but the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may not be executed at the same time. In this case, for example, the variable display of the first special symbol and the variable display of the second special symbol may be executed in the winning order of the first start winning opening 13 and the second start winning opening 14, The variable display of any special symbol (for example, the second special symbol) may be configured to be executed with priority. In addition, when the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to be executed prior to the variation display of the first special symbol, the variation display of the second special symbol is configured to include the case where it becomes the off It is desirable not to be too irritating than necessary.

Further, according to this embodiment, the game machine (in this example, a game ball) can be provided with a predetermined area (in this example, operation gate 17) through which the game medium (in this example) can pass. It is controllable. Then, after the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, it is possible to control in an advantageous state based on the passage of the game medium through the predetermined area. Therefore, when the player breaks the game after the end of the special state, it is possible to limit the progress of the control to the advantageous state during the break of the player. In particular, in this embodiment, since the variation time of the second special symbol is as long as 15 minutes or 5 minutes in the non-KT state, the low probability /
Immediately after ending the first KT state, when the variation display of the second special symbol is executed and the player has entered a break because it is a variation display for a long time, the variation display of the second special symbol Even if the player is a big hit, it is possible to limit the progress of the big hit game during the break, and it is possible to prevent the situation in which the player's profit is lost.

Although this embodiment shows the case where the operation gate 17 is provided separately from the gate 32, the gate 32 and the operation gate 17 may be configured as a common gate.

In addition, it is not necessary to provide the operation gate 17, and when the jackpot symbol is derived and displayed,
It may be configured to shift to a big hit game as it is after the symbol determination display time has elapsed.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to externally output an advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) which can be specified to be controlled to the advantageous state. Further, when the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol) is derived and displayed as the display result of the variable display, the advantageous state signal can be externally output. Therefore, it is possible to notify the gaming staff that the unmanned gaming machine having no player is in an advantageous state, and to promote the initialization of the gaming machine.

The external output of the advantageous state signal (in this example, the big hit signal 1 and the big hit signal 2) is not necessarily essential, and the advantageous state signal may not be output to the outside.

Also, according to this embodiment, the game medium is displayed in the first area (in this example, the big winning opening) based on the display result of the variable display becoming the specific display result (in this example, the big hit symbol). Control is possible in an advantageous state (in the present example, the big hit gaming state) in which (the game ball in this example) can be entered, and the display result of the variable display becomes the predetermined display result (in the present example, the small hit symbol) Based on the input, it is possible to control in a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state) in which game media can enter the second area (in this example, the special winning opening 24). The special state (in this example, the KT state) which can be controlled to a predetermined state can be controlled, and as the special state, the first special state (in this example, the high probability / the first KT state) It can be controlled to the second special state (in this example, the high probability / the second KT state), which is more advantageous than the special state (1) Then, in response to the game medium having entered the second area, it is possible to externally output a special signal (in this example, a special winning opening winning signal). Therefore, it is possible to notify the outside of the entry situation of game media to the second area, and to manage the gaming machine appropriately outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the example shown in FIG. 32, when the big hit signal 1 is not output, the winning
If the number of award balls obtained per 100 game ball launch, BA) is BA> 100, there is a possibility that an act of illegally obtaining the prize ball was carried out even though the player is not in the jackpot And the hole management computer can determine that there is an abnormality. However, even in such a case, if the big hit signal 2 is output and the special winning opening winning signal is output, a winning ball may be obtained in a small hit game in the KT state. , BA> 100
Even if it is not, it can be determined that it is not abnormal, and appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

Further, according to this embodiment, the common signal which is common to the case of being controlled to the first special state and the case of being controlled to the second special state can be externally output (in this example, FIG. 32). As shown in (1), the common special winning opening winning signal is externally output regardless of whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state). Therefore, the external output process on the gaming machine side can be simplified.

As a modification shown in FIG. 33, as a special signal, a first special signal (in this example, special winning opening winning signal 1) and a second special signal (in this example) different from the first special signal , And special winning opening winning signal 2) can be externally output, the first special signal can be externally output when being controlled to the first special state, the second when it is controlled to the second special state (2) As shown in FIG. 33, it is possible to externally output the special signal (as shown in FIG. 33, externally output the special winning opening winning signal 1 during the first KT state and externally output the special winning opening winning signal 2 during the second KT state) You may configure it. With such a configuration, the state of the gaming machine can be appropriately managed outside the gaming machine.

For example, in the modification shown in FIG. 33, big hit signal 1 is not output and big hit signal 2
If the special winning opening winning signal 1 is output, the winning ball ratio (BA1) in the first KT state is calculated, and if the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, the second KT state It may be calculated as a winning ball rate (BA2). And, in the second KT state, there is a possibility that a corresponding winning ball can be obtained in the small hit game, so even if BA2> 100, it is determined not to be abnormal and in the first KT state the winning ball Because it is rare to be obtained, it may be determined as abnormal if BA1> 100. With such a configuration, appropriate management from outside the gaming machine can be performed.

Also, for example, in the examples shown in FIG. 32 and FIG. 33, although the big hit signal 2 is not output (that is, although it is not KT state), the special winning opening winning signal (
Even when the special winning opening winning signal 1 or the special winning opening winning signal 2 is output, it may be determined as abnormal and notified to a game clerk or the like. Further, even when the output frequency of the special winning opening winning signal is abnormally high, it may be determined as abnormal and notified to a game clerk or the like.

Further, in this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 32 and 33, the number of terminals provided on the external output terminal slope is limited (10 terminals in this example). Only the special winning opening indicating the detection is configured to be able to output, and it is configured not to output the external output signal particularly when the winning to the special winning opening is detected. Even if such a configuration is made, it is possible to detect an abnormal state of the gaming machine 1 to a certain extent by notifying the external device such as the hole management computer of even the winning situation to the special winning opening 24.

The external output of the special signal (in this example, the special winning opening winning signal) is not necessarily essential, and the special signal may not be externally output.

Further, according to this embodiment, the display state of the variable display is different from the advantageous state (the big hit gaming state in the present example) based on the predetermined display result (the small hit symbol in the present example). Control is possible to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state), and control is possible to a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of control to the predetermined state is increased. In the special condition game media (
In this example, a special area (in this example, special winning opening 24) to which the game ball can enter is provided, and as a special state, the first special state (in this example, high probability / first KT state); Control can be made to a second special state (in this example, high probability / second KT state), which has a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Also, it is possible to execute an entry effect (in this example, the display of the award ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a) based on the game medium entering the specific area in the second special state If the game medium enters the specific area in the first special state, the entry effect is not executed (in this example, even if the game ball is in the special winning opening 24 when it is not the second KT state, the winning ball) The display of the addition display, the output of the winning sound, and the lighting display of the special winning opening lamp 24a are not performed). Therefore, the game state and the entry state are not executed by the entry of irregular game media in the first special state (in the present example, the special winning opening 24 is not originally awarded in the first KT state). This makes it possible to achieve consistency in the presentation, enhance the entry of game media into the specific area in the second special state, and improve the interest in the game. Therefore, it is possible to improve the effect when controlling to the special state.

Further, according to this embodiment, it is possible to control to the advantageous state (in the present example, the big hit gaming state), and as the advantageous state, the first advantageous state (in the present example, the 6R positive variation big hit, the 2R positive variation big hit) and the It can be controlled in two advantageous states (in this example, 16R probability variation big hits). In addition, it can be controlled to the first special state after being controlled to the first advantageous state, and can be controlled to the second special state after being controlled to the second advantageous state (in this example, 6R positive variation big hit or 2R Transition to high probability / 1 KT state after the end of the big hit game based on the probability variation big hit, transition to the high probability / 2 KT status after the big hit game termination based on the 16 R probability variation big hit), from the period controlled to the second advantageous state 2) Special effects (in this example, sound output of music for the second KT) can be executed over a period controlled to the special state. Therefore, the rendering effect in the second special state can be enhanced, and the interest for the game can be improved.

Further, according to this embodiment, as the entry effect, an addition effect corresponding to the addition of the game value (in the present example, the display of the award ball addition display), an effect by the sound output corresponding to the entry of the game medium At least one of the effects (in this example, the output of the winning sound) and the effect by the light emission of the light emitter (in this example, the special winning opening lamp 24a is lit). for that reason,
The entry of game media into the specific area in the second special state can be emphasized, and the interest to the game can be improved.

In addition, the entry effect (in this example, the display of the winning ball addition display, the output of the winning sound, the special winning opening lamp 2
Execution of the special effects (in this example, the sound output of the music for the 2 KT in this example) is not always required, and it is configured not to execute one or both of these It is also good.

In this embodiment, on the side of the effect control microcomputer 200, the first
It shows the case where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is executed corresponding to the variable display of the special symbol, the variable display of the second decorative symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and the variable display of the background symbol is executed. However, it is not limited to such an aspect. For example, it is possible to execute the variation display of the small symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of the first special symbol and the variation display of the small symbol and the fourth symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol It is also good. In this case, the variable display of the fourth symbol may be configured to be displayed in the display screen of the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device), or may be configured by a lamp or LED other than the effect display device 9 It is also good.

[Modification]
Below, the modification of embodiment mentioned above is described. In this modification, an example of a display screen (screen layout) displayed on the effect display device 9 mainly in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state) and the KT state (especially low probability / first KT state), An example of display control of the hold display corresponding to the second hold storage when transitioning from the low probability / first KT state to the normal state will be described. In the following, the hold display corresponding to the first hold storage is referred to as the first hold display, and the second hold display
The hold display corresponding to the hold storage may be referred to as a second hold display.

Although the details will be apparent from the following description, in this modification, unlike the above-described embodiment, the effect display device 9 displays a background symbol according to the variable display of the special symbol (the first background shown in FIG. A small symbol (a first small symbol display portion 91b shown in FIG. 63, a second small symbol display shown in FIG. 63) and a background symbol displayed on the symbol display portion 91a and the second background symbol display portion 92a is variably displayed. The small symbols displayed on the part 92b are displayed in a variable manner, and the first hold display (the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 shown in FIG. 63) or the second hold display (the figure) according to the gaming state. The second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 shown in 63 is displayed (that is, the first and second hold displays are not added and displayed as in the embodiment described above), and depending on the gaming state , 1st
The specific display (the first specific display in the first specific display section 61a shown in FIG. 63) or the second specific display (the second specific display in the second specific display section 62a shown in FIG. 63) is displayed Is displayed (the first storage number display 71 shown in FIG. 63). Further, in this modification, mainly the portions different from the above-described embodiment will be described, and the other portions will be described as the same configurations and processes as the above-described embodiment unless otherwise noted. I omit it.

FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing pending storage display control processing (step S 707) in the modification. In this hold storage display control process, display control of the first hold display, the second hold display, and the hold number display corresponding to the first hold storage number displayed on the effect display device 9 is performed.

In the hold storage display control process, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not the first valid start winning command has been received (step S7071). Whether or not the first valid start winning command has been received depends on, for example, whether or not the flag corresponding to the type of the received command (effect control command) is set in the process of step S670 shown in FIG. It is recognizable.

The effect control CPU 201 receives the first valid start winning command (step S7).
Update the number of pending displays corresponding to the first number of pending storages in Y of 071 (step S 707)
2). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 adds 1 to the first pending storage number when receiving the first valid start winning command, and 1 when the first change pattern command is received.
The subtraction is performed, and the first number of pending storages is stored, for example, in the first number of pending storages buffer. Therefore,
When receiving the first valid start winning command, the effect control CPU 201 updates and displays the number-of-holds display (first number-of-held storages number display 71) indicating the first number of pending storages added by one. In addition, CPU201 for production control, when fluctuation indication of the special design which corresponds to the 1st reservation memory is started (
When the first variation pattern command is received), the number-of-holds display (first number-of-held-memorys number display 71) indicating the first number-of-held storages subtracted by 1 is updated and displayed.

After that, the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S7).
073) If the state is not the non-KT state (N in step S7073), the processing ends, and if it is the non-KT state (Y in step S7073), the suspension notice determination process is executed (S)
7074). Note that whether or not it is in the non-KT state (or KT state) is, for example, as shown in FIG.
It can be recognized in accordance with the type of background image currently displayed by the processes of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

In the pending notice determination process in step S7074, any one of a plurality of special modes (for example, "blue", "green", "red") different from the normal mode (for example, "white") is displayed as the display mode of the first pending display. It is decided whether to give a hold notice to be changed or, if so, which special mode is to be changed (that is, the contents of the change). Specifically, when receiving the first valid start winning command from the game control microcomputer 560, the effect control CPU 201 also receives a first prize determination result command. More specifically, the gaming control microcomputer 560 is a jackpot determination random number (random 1), which is extracted based on the valid start winnings and stored in the first storage buffer in the first starting opening switch passing process. Based on the type determination random number (Random 2) and the variation pattern determination random number (Random 5), it is determined whether a big hit or not and the variation pattern is determined, and the command indicating the determination result is the first prize determination result Send a command Therefore, the effect control CPU 201 determines the on-hold notice based on the first prize determination result command received together with the first valid start winning command. For example, in the effect control CPU 201, the variation pattern indicated by the first prize determination result command is
In the case of the jackpot fluctuation pattern, it is decided to change at a high rate to a special mode (eg, “red”) that indicates that the jackpot expectation is high. For example, CPU 2 for effect control
In the case of 01, it is determined that the variation pattern indicated by the first prize determination result command is not changed to the special mode at a high rate (is kept in the normal mode) when the variation pattern is an out variation pattern. The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the effect control CPU 201 may select the variation pattern indicated by the first prize determination result command as having a high hit probability (that is, it is easy to be selected when a big hit, an off) When it is a fluctuation pattern that is hard to be done, it is decided to change at a high rate to a special mode (eg, “red”) that indicates that the big hit expectation is high, and
When the variation pattern indicated by the win determination result command is one with a low probability of big hit (that is, a variation pattern that is hard to be selected at the big hit and easy to be selected at the off).
It may be determined at a high rate in the normal mode that does not indicate the jackpot expectation. In addition, the display mode of the first hold display is not changed to the special mode at the start winning prize (that is, when the first valid start winning command is received), and other timing (for example, the first hold display is shifted and displayed) It is also possible to decide to change at a predetermined timing during the variable symbol display of the special symbol). Further, in the processing for determining the holding notice, the first specific display (described later) to be displayed when the first holding display is erased and the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first holding display is started The display mode of the first specific display on the display unit 61a may be determined in advance.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 increments the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7074 (step S7075).

On the other hand, when the first valid start winning command has not been received (N in step S7071), the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not the second valid start winning command has been received (step S7076). If the effect control CPU 201 receives the second valid start winning command (Y in step S 7076), it determines whether or not it is in the KT state (step S 70).
7077), if the second valid start winning command has not been received (N in step S7076)
To step S7083).

If the CPU 201 for effect control is not in the KT state (N in step S 7077),
If the process is ended and the KT state is established (Y in step S7077), it is determined whether the chance time end / the remaining 9 change or less is satisfied (step S7078). Here, with the chance time, the special symbol is 1 after the big hit game based on 6R normal big hit and 2R normal big hit.
This means the low probability / first KT state controlled until it changes 00 times (that is, 100 revolutions after the end of the big hit game). It should be noted that the remaining fluctuation number of the chance time end 迄 is, for example, fluctuation after the effect control CPU 201 receives the low probability / first KT background designation command for the first time by the processing of step S633 shown in FIG. It can be recognized by storing the number and subtracting it from the specified number of chance times (100 times).

If it is not less than the chance time end 迄 remaining 9 change (N in step S 7078),
The effect control CPU 201 executes the on-hold notice determination process (step S7079). Note that the process for determining the on-hold notice in step S7079 is the same as the on-hold notice determination process described in the process in step S7074, and can be explained by replacing "first" in the on-hold notice determination process in step S7074 with "second". . After that, the effect control CPU 201 increments the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 by 1 in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S7079 (step S7080).

If it is less than the chance time end 迄 the remaining 9 change (Y in step S7078), the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether it is less than the chance time end 迄 the remaining 5 change (step S7081). If the chance time end チ ャ ン ス remaining 5 fluctuation or less (step S
In Y) of 7081, the effect control CPU 201 ends the processing. At this time, if there is a second hold display already displayed, the effect control CPU 201 may control all the second hold display to be non-display. If it is not less than the chance time end / remaining 5 fluctuation (ie, in the case of remaining 9 fluctuation ~ 6 fluctuation; N in step S7081), the effect control CPU 201 performs the second hold in the second hold display unit 62 in the normal mode. Increase the display by 1 (
Step S7082).

If neither the first valid start winning command nor the second start winning command has been received, the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not a predetermined state change has occurred (step S7083).
. Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 changes from the jackpot gaming state to the KT state as a predetermined state change based on the background designation command or the big hit start designation command transmitted from the game control microcomputer 560, or It is determined whether there is a change from the KT state to the non-KT state. If there is no predetermined state change (N in step S7083),
The effect control CPU 201 ends the process, and when there is a predetermined state change (step S7).
In Y of 083, in response to the status change, the displayed first hold display or second hold display is not displayed (step S7084). Specifically, when the gaming state changes from the big hit gaming state to the KT state, the effect control CPU 201 hides the first hold display, and the gaming state from the KT state (precisely, the first KT state) to non-KT When the status changes, the second hold display is hidden. In addition, CPU201 for production control displays the 2nd suspension display corresponding to the 2nd suspension memory concerned, when it has the 2nd suspension memory, when a game state changes from a big hit game state to a KT state. , Gaming state from KT state (correctly the first KT state) from non-KT
If it has the first pending storage when it changes to the state, the first pending display corresponding to the first pending storage is displayed.

  Here, characteristic points in the above-described suspension storage display control process will be described.

When the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), the pending number display update (step S7072) is executed, but when the second valid start winning command is received (step S7076) In Y), the pending count display update is not performed. From this, it is understood that while the number of reservations corresponding to the first number of pending storages is updated and displayed, the number of reservations corresponding to the second number of pending storages is not displayed. Also, while the number of reservations corresponding to the first number of reserved memories is updated and displayed regardless of the gaming state (KT state or non-KT state), the number of reservations corresponding to the second number of held memories It is also understood that is not displayed regardless of the gaming state.

In addition, when the first valid start winning command is received (Y in step S7071), it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S7073) and the first hold display is not increased (step S).
When the processing of 7075 is not executed) and the second valid start winning command is received (step S)
If the state is not the KT state (Y in 7076) (N in step S7077), the second hold display is not increased (the processes in steps S7080 and S7082 are not executed). The first hold display is not displayed when the KT state is entered after the big hit, and the second hold display is not displayed when the KT state is shifted to the non-KT state (steps S7083 and S7084). From this, the first hold display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second hold display is not displayed in the non-KT state and displayed in the KT state. It can be understood that

Also, when the second valid start winning command is received (Y in step S 7076), the suspension notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 9 or less (step S 7).
S7079 is not executed due to Y of 078). In addition, the second hold display is not increased when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is five or less (Y in step S7081 results in S708
2 will not run). From this, when the number of remaining times of the chance time ending until the second holding display reaches 9 times to 6 times, the execution of the holding notice is limited (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times of ending the chance time is 5 If the number is less than the number of times, it can be understood that the execution of the holding notice is limited and the addition of the second holding display is limited (hidden) even in the KT state. in this way,
As for the second hold display, different display control is performed according to the remaining number of chance time ending habits even in the same gaming state, but the reason will be described later with reference to FIG.

FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing background symbol variation start processing (step S901) in the modification. In the background symbol variation start process, the same processes as the processes described with reference to FIG. 51 are denoted by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof is omitted.

In the background symbol variation start process, the effect control CPU 201 executes a specific display control process (step S920A). Here, the specific display control process will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing a specific display control process (step S920A) in the modification. In this specific display control process, the first specific display (the first specific display on the first specific display portion 61a shown in FIG. 63) and the second specific display (the second specific display shown in FIG. 63) displayed on the effect display device 9 The display control of the second specific display in the section 62a) and the shielding effect is performed.
Here, the first specific display corresponds to the first special display, and is different from the first hold display unit 61 between the start of the variable display and the end of the variable display corresponding to the variable display. This is a display that is displayed by the 1 specific display unit 61a and that specifies the execution of the variable display. In addition, the second specific display is a second different from the second hold display unit 62 from the start until the end of the variable display corresponding to the variable display during the variable display of the second special symbol. Displayed on the specific display 62a,
It is a display for specifying execution of the said variable display. In addition, the first specific display (or second specific display) has the same shape and size as the first pending display (or the second pending display) displayed on the first pending display unit 61 (or the second pending display unit 62). Is displayed. However, the first specific display and the first
The hold indication (or the second specific indication and the second hold indication) may be different in shape, may be different in size, and may be displayed in a completely different manner. For example, the first specific display and the first
It is desirable that the hold display (or the second specific display and the second hold display) be displayed in a mode in which a part of the shape or color is similar. In addition, the shielding effect means an effect of shielding the second hold display and the second specific display in a manner that makes it difficult to visually recognize.

In the specific display control process, the CPU 201 for production control determines whether or not the received fluctuation pattern command is the first fluctuation pattern (that is, the fluctuation pattern command for the first special symbol) (step S9301). If it is the first variation pattern (Y in step S9301), the effect control CPU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S9302), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302) The processing ends, and when it is in the non-KT state (Y in step S9302), the specific advance notice determination processing is executed (S9303). In addition, whether it is a non-KT state (or KT state),
For example, it can be recognized in accordance with the type of background image currently displayed by the processing of steps S631, S634, S638, and S642 shown in FIG.

In the specific notice determination process of step S9303, any one of a plurality of special modes (for example, “blue”, “green”, “red”) different from the normal mode (for example, “white”) in the display mode of the first specific display If a specific notice to be changed is given, and if so, it is determined which special mode is to be changed (that is, the contents of the change). Specifically, the effect control CPU 201 determines a specific advance notice based on the received first variation pattern command. For example, CPU for effect control
201 determines that the first variation pattern is changed at a high rate to a special aspect (eg, “red”) that indicates a high expectation for a big hit when it is a big hit variation pattern.
In addition, for example, the effect control CPU 201 determines that the first variation pattern is not changed to the special mode at a high rate (when the first variation pattern is the normal mode) when the first variation pattern is the variation pattern of out. In addition to the above, for example, the CPU 201 for effect control has a first variation pattern with a high probability of having a big hit (that is, a variation pattern that is easy to be selected when big hit and hard to be selected when falling off) Sometimes it is decided to change at a high rate to a special aspect (eg, "red") that indicates that the big hit expectation is high, and the first variation pattern is one where the big hit expectation is low (ie, big hit) When it is a fluctuation pattern that is difficult to be selected and is likely to be selected at the time of removal, it may be determined at a high rate in a normal mode that does not indicate the jackpot expectation. In addition, the display mode of the first specific display is not changed to the special mode at the start of fluctuation (that is, when the first fluctuation pattern command is received), and other timing (for example,
It may be determined to change at a predetermined timing during the variation display of the special symbol. Further, in the above-mentioned suspension notice determination process (step S7074), when the display mode of the first specific display is determined in advance at the start winning prize (that is, based on the pre-reading), the first determined based on the pre-reading The display mode of the first specific display in the specific advance notice determination process may be determined based on the display mode of the one specific display. Specifically, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined to be “green” based on the pre-reading, a special mode that indicates that the big hit expectation is higher than “green” (for example, While it is possible to determine “red”), it is prohibited to decide in a mode (eg “green”) that indicates that the big hit expectation is lower than “green” (that is, the fall of the big hit expectation is prohibited) ) May be used. Also, for example, when the display mode of the first specific display is determined based on the pre-reading, the first specific display mode is displayed in the display mode determined based on the pre-reading, and in the specific notice determination process The display mode may not be determined.

Thereafter, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the first specific display in the first specific display unit 61 a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9303 (
Step S9304).

On the other hand, when it is not the first variation pattern (that is, when it is the variation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S9301), the CPU 201 for effect control controls the KT
It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S9305), and if it is not in the state of KT (step S930)
If N in 9305, the process ends, and if it is in the KT state (Y in step S7077), it is determined whether the chance time end / the remaining 9 fluctuation or less (step S9306)
).

If it is not less than the chance time end 迄 remaining 9 change (N in step S9306)
The effect control CPU 201 executes a specific advance notice determination process (step S9307). The specific advance notice determination process of step S9307 is the same as the specific advance notice determination process described in the process of step S9303, and can be described by replacing “first” in the specific advance notice determination process of step S9303 with “second”. . After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display portion 62a in the mode (normal mode or special mode) determined in the process of step S9307 (step S9308).

If it is less than the chance time end / the remaining 9 change (Y in step S9306), the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether it is less than the chance time end / the remaining 5 change (step S9309). If it is not less than the chance time end 迄 remaining 5 fluctuation (that is,
In the case of the remaining 9 variations to 6 variations; N in step S9309, the effect control CPU 201 sets the display of the second specific display in the second specific display section 62a in the normal mode (step S)
9310).

When it is less than chance time end / remaining 5 fluctuation (Y in step S9309), the CPU 201 for effect control sets display of the shielding effect (step S9311). here,
The shielding effect is an effect that makes the visibility of the second hold display and the second specific display difficult. For example, the transparency of the screen displayed on the front layer of the second hold display or the second specific display is a chance. It is a blackout effect in which it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display or the second specific display by gradually lowering the number according to the decrease in the number of remaining times of the time ending habit. The background symbol in the second background symbol display portion 92a, the small symbol in the second small symbol display portion 92b, and the first reserved storage number display 71 are displayed on the front layer more than the blackout effect, etc. Even if the blackout effect is executed, it may be visible.

Although not described in the specific display control process described above, during the chance time, display setting of the remaining number display 81 (see FIG. 63) indicating the remaining number of times until the chance time ends is performed. Specifically, when the jackpot game is controlled to the low probability / first KT state (that is, the chance time is entered), the initial number of times (control to the low probability / first KT state) as the number indicated by the remaining number display 81 The remaining number display 81 is controlled to the low probability / first KT state by the display setting being made 100 times and the number of times that 1 is subtracted being displayed each time variable display of the special symbol is started Indicates the remaining number (of opportunity time).

  Here, characteristic points in the specific display control process described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S9301), it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S9302) and the display of the first specific display is not set (step S9304)
When the second fluctuation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the display of the second specific display is not set (N in step S9305) (N in step S9301) (steps S9308, S9310). Processing is not performed). From this, the first specific display is not displayed in the KT state and is displayed in the non-KT state (normal state), and the second specific display is not displayed in the non-KT state and displayed in the KT state. It can be understood that

In addition, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S9301), the specific advance notice is not executed if the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 9 or less (Y in step S9306 does not execute S9307). In addition, the second specific display is not displayed and set when the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 5 or less (Y in step S9309 is not performed S9310). From this, when the number of remaining times of the chance time end until the second specific display reaches 9 times to 6 times, the execution of the specific notice is limited (displayed in the normal mode), and the remaining number of times of the chance time ending is 5 If the number is less than the number of times, it is understood that the execution of the specific advance notice is limited and the display of the second specific display is limited (non-displayed) even in the KT state. Thus, the second
Although different display control is performed according to the remaining number of chance times even in the same gaming state as the specific display, the reason will be described later with reference to FIG.

Description returns to FIG. 61. In the background symbol variation start process, the CPU 201 for effect control determines whether or not the received variation pattern command is the first variation pattern (step S9).
20B). If it is the first variation pattern (Y in step S920B), C for effect control
The PU 201 determines whether or not it is in the non-KT state (step S920C), and if it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), sets the first non-display effect as a background symbol variation pattern (step S920F). ). On the other hand, in the non-KT state (step S920)
In Y of C, the CPU 201 for effect control determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (
In step S920D), one of the first variation effects is set as the background symbol pattern (step S920E). Here, the background symbol variation pattern is set according to the variation pattern, and the variation pattern of the background symbol and the small symbol (for example, temporarily stopping the reach symbol during the variation, temporarily stopping the pseudo run symbol that suggests the pseudo run) It is an effect pattern that defines a fluctuation mode) such as causing the The first variation effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and the first background symbol display portion 91
It is a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the small pattern in the background pattern and the first small symbol display part 91b in a, the first non-display effect is set according to the first variation pattern, and the first background pattern is displayed It is an effect pattern in which the background symbol in the portion 91a and the small symbol in the first small symbol display portion 91b are not variably displayed (not displayed).

On the other hand, when it is not the first variation pattern (that is, when it is the variation pattern command for the second special symbol; N in step S920B), the CPU 201 for effect control controls the KT
It is determined whether or not it is in the state (step S920G), and if it is not in the state KT (step S920)
In N) of 920G, the second non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern (step S920J). On the other hand, when it is in the KT state (Y in step S920G), the effect control CPU 201 determines the stop symbol of the background symbol and the small symbol (step S920H), and selects one of the second variation effects as the background symbol pattern. The setting is made (step S920I). Here, the second variation effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and a plurality of effect patterns corresponding to the variation pattern of the background symbol in the second background symbol display portion 92a and the small symbols in the second small symbol display portion 92b. The second non-display effect is set according to the second variation pattern, and the background symbol in the second background symbol display portion 92a and the small symbol in the second small symbol display portion 92b are not variably displayed (non-display) It is an effect pattern.

After that, the effect control CPU 201 sets the background pattern fluctuation pattern (step S9).
20E, S920F, S920I, and 920J) or the specified display (step S)
9304, S9308, S9310) and the set shielding effect (step S9311)
Refer to step S920K) to select a process table according to the above. As a result, in the subsequent processing, various effects of the set contents are output from the effect device (effect display device 9, various lamps, speakers 27) along with the fluctuation display of the special symbol.

  Here, characteristic points in the background symbol variation start process described above will be described below.

When the first variation pattern is received (Y in step S920B), it is not in the non-KT state (N in step S920C), and the first non-display effect is set as the background symbol variation pattern, thereby the first background pattern The background symbol is not displayed on the display unit 91a, and the small symbol is not displayed on the first small symbol display unit 91b (step S920F). On the other hand, when the second variation pattern is received (N in step S920B), the state is not KT (step S).
By setting the second non-display effect as the N) background symbol variation pattern of 920G, the background symbol is not displayed in the second background symbol display part 92a, and the small symbol is not displayed in the second small symbol display part 92b ( Step S920F). From this, in the non-KT state (normal state), when the variation display of the first special symbol is performed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed according to the variation display, but the variation display of the second special symbol is It is understood that the background pattern and the small figure are not displayed according to the variable display even if it is performed. In addition, in the KT state, when the second special symbol is variably displayed, the background symbol and the small symbol are variably displayed according to the variation display, but even if the first special symbol is variably displayed, the variation is performed. It can be seen that the background design and the small design are not displayed according to the display.

In addition, the background symbol and the small symbol are not variably displayed corresponding to the variable symbols of the special symbols respectively (for example, the background symbol corresponds to the variable symbol of the first special symbol, the small symbol is the first 2
It does not change display separately corresponding to the change display of a special symbol). For this reason, the background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in synchronization with each other, and an effect without a sense of incongruity is realized, and the target (the first special symbol or the second special symbol) of the variable symbol of the small symbol is according to the gaming state. Can be identified.

[Screen layout]
Next, the screen layout (display screen) in the effect display device 9 displayed by the process shown in the flowcharts of FIG. 60 to FIG. 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 6
3 (1) shows an example of the screen layout in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), and FIG. 63 (2) shows an example of the screen layout in the chance time (low probability / first KT state).

As shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state (low probability / non-KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) is configured to display the first hold display portion 61 at the lower left portion of the display screen. Pending display is displayed. Specifically, in the first hold display unit 61, the maximum number of first
Here, the first hold display of the number corresponding to 4) is arranged left and right. In addition, the first specific display is displayed on the first specific display unit 61 a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right of the first hold display unit 61. Then, when the variable display of the first special symbol corresponding to the first hold storage is started, the hold display corresponding to the variable display to be started out of the first hold display displayed on the first hold display unit 61 (one One hold display on the right side is erased, shifted (moved) to the first specific display unit 61a, and displayed as a first specific display, and the remaining first hold displays are shifted toward the right one by one ( Be moved). The first hold display unit 61 and the first specification display unit 61a may be disposed at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the first hold display and the first specification display may be shifted. Alternatively, the display may be erased and then redisplayed at another position.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number-of-retentions display corresponding to the first number of pending storages in the left central portion of the display screen. 1
The pending storage number display 71 is displayed. In addition, as a mode of the 1st pending storage number display, it may be a number itself indicating the 1st pending storage number, and the display lamps of the number according to the 1st pending storage number are lit and displayed. It is also good.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63 (1), in the normal state, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) changes the first special symbol in the first background symbol display portion 91a at the center of the display screen. The background symbol corresponding to the display is variably displayed, and the small symbol corresponding to the fluctuating display of the first special symbol is variably displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b at the upper right portion of the display screen.

As shown in FIG. 63 (2), in the chance time (low probability / first KT state), the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the second hold display unit 62 at the lower left of the display screen. Pending display is displayed. Specifically, in the second hold display unit 62, the second hold displays of the number corresponding to the maximum storage number (here, 4) of the second hold storage number are arranged in the left and right. In addition, a second specific display unit 62 a provided at the lower center of the display screen and adjacent to the right of the second hold display unit 62.
The second specific display is displayed at. Then, when the variable display of the second special symbol corresponding to the second holding storage is started, the holding display corresponding to the variable display to be started out of the second holding display displayed on the second holding display unit 62 (1 The second right display unit 6 is cleared by one)
The second specific display is shifted (moved) to 2a and displayed as a second specific display, and the remaining second pending displays are shifted (moved) to the right one by one. The second hold display unit 62 or the second specification display unit 62a may be disposed at any position on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the second hold display or the second specification display may be shifted. Alternatively, the display may be erased and then redisplayed at another position.

Further, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), even at the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the number of reservations which is the number of reservations corresponding to the first number of reservations in the left central portion of the display screen. The 1 pending storage number display 71 is displayed. On the other hand, the hold count display corresponding to the second hold storage count is not displayed.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), at the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) changes the second special symbol in the second background symbol display portion 92a at the center of the display screen. The background pattern corresponding to the display is variably displayed, and the second small symbol display portion 9 in the upper right portion of the display screen is displayed.
The small symbols corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol are variably displayed in 2b.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 63 (2), at the chance time, the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) displays the remaining number of times indicating the remaining number of chance time ends until the bottom right corner of the display screen.
1 is displayed, and an indication (for example, character display such as “in chance time”) is displayed in the upper left corner of the display screen to indicate that the present chance time is in progress. In the middle), a rightward display is performed to instruct the player to perform a shooting operation (rightward strike) aiming at the right side of the game area 7.

Here, although not shown, the screen layout in the high probability / first KT state and high probability / second KT state will be briefly described. In the high probability / first KT state, a screen layout similar to that in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed.
Is displayed on the upper left corner of the display screen, indicating that the point is not displayed and that it is in the high probability / first KT state (
For example, it differs in that character display such as "during normal rush" is performed. High probability / 2nd
In the KT state, a screen layout similar to that in the low probability / first KT state shown in FIG. 63 (2) is displayed, but the remaining frequency display 81 is not displayed, and the high probability / first in the upper left corner of the display screen 2
The difference is that a display indicating the KT state (for example, character display such as "during special rush") is performed.

As described above, in the normal state, the first hold display can be displayed and the first specific display can be displayed on the effect display device 9, and the background symbol is displayed corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol. And small symbols are displayed fluctuatingly. On the other hand, in the normal state, the second hold display or the second specific display is not displayed on the effect display device 9, and the background corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol even if the second special symbol is variably displayed. The symbols and small symbols are not displayed. In addition, during the chance time (or KT state), the second display can be displayed on the effect display device 9 and the second specific display can be displayed, corresponding to the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. The background symbol and the small symbol are displayed in a variable manner. On the other hand, during the chance time (or in the KT state), the first hold display or the first specific display is not displayed on the effect display device 9, and the first special symbol is variably displayed. Background symbols and small symbols corresponding to variable display are not displayed. As described above, in the normal state, the variable display of the background symbol and the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not performed, and the second hold display and the second specific display are not displayed. Even if the second special symbol variation display is performed for a very long time (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes), the player's recognition of the second special symbol variation display can be reduced, and appropriate. It becomes possible to perform presentation control. In addition, in the KT state such as during the chance time, as a result of the fluctuation display of the second special symbol whose fluctuation time is shorter than the normal state, the occurrence frequency of small hits per unit time is increased, so the player can We pay attention to the variation display of the second special symbol that triggers the hit. For this reason, in the KT state, even if the variable display of the first special symbol is performed, the variable display of the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol is not performed,
By not performing the first reserved display or the first specific display, the recognition degree of the variable display of the first special symbol can be reduced and more attention can be paid to the variable display of the second special symbol.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and (2), in the normal state, the small symbols are variably displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and during the chance time ( Alternatively, in the KT state), the small symbols are variably displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol. Therefore, the background symbol in the first background symbol display portion 91a in the normal state, and the second in the chance time (or in the KT state)
Even if the variation display of the background symbol in the background symbol display portion 92a becomes non-displayed (or difficult to visually recognize) by a predetermined effect (for example, reach effect etc.), the player confirms the small symbol, It is possible to recognize an appropriate special symbol variation display depending on the condition.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the display indicating the number of second holding memories is not displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is, although the second hold display is not displayed in the normal state, when the display indicating the number of the second hold storage is performed, there is a possibility that inconsistency of the effect may occur. In addition, during the chance time, when the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 5 times or less, the display of the second hold display is limited (the screen effect is blocked or not controlled). ). For this reason, for example, although the display of the second hold display is limited during the chance time, when the number of the second hold storage is displayed, there is a possibility that the inconsistency of the effect may occur. Therefore, during the chance time, the second from the beginning
By not displaying the number of pending memories, the remaining number of chances until the end of the chance time is 5 or less,
Even when the display of the second hold display is restricted, an effect without a sense of incongruity is realized.
For the above reasons, the display indicating the number of second holding memories is not performed regardless of the gaming state, but for example, the KT state different from the chance time (the KT state is guaranteed until the next big hit) In this case, since the second pending display is not limited, the number of second pending storages may be displayed.

Further, as can be seen from FIGS. 63 (1) and 63 (2), the first number-of-held-memory number display 71 indicating the number of first reserved memory is displayed regardless of the gaming state. This is due to the following reasons. That is,
In the non-KT state (normal state), since the display of the first hold display is not limited, the player's recognition is secured by displaying the first hold memory number display 71 in the normal state. Also,
Because the fluctuation time of the first special symbol is not long (for example, 10 seconds or less) even in the KT state, K
When the T state is started, even if the first pending memory remains, it is immediately digested, and in the KT state, since the right strike is performed, the first pending memory is rarely newly generated. For this reason, even if the first pending storage number display 71 is displayed in the KT state, the number is "0".
In most cases, the player is less likely to feel discomfort. In addition, the player is made to recognize that the game is a right-handed game (that is, a game in which the second special symbol is variably displayed) by making the player recognize that the first number-of-retentions memory number display 71 indicates "0". It becomes possible to concentrate on the more right-handed game. For the above reasons, although the display of the first number-of-held-memory-number display 71 is performed regardless of the gaming state, it may be non-displayed in the KT state.

In the normal state, the fourth symbol is variably displayed corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol, and in the KT state such as during the chance time, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol. The fourth symbol may be variably displayed. Here, the variable display of the fourth symbol is a predetermined display in an area which is a part of the display screen of the effect display device 9 and which is smaller than the first minor symbol display portion 91b and the second minor symbol display portion 92b. This is realized by continuing the state of repeating lighting and extinguishing at constant time intervals in a color (for example, blue). In addition, the area where the fourth symbol is variably displayed (the fourth symbol display area) may be an area different from the display screen of the effect display device 9, for example, using a light emitter such as a lamp or an LED A four symbol display area may be realized. In this way, by performing the variation display of the fourth symbol, when the background symbol or the small symbol corresponding to the variation display of the second special symbol is not displayed in the normal state, or in the variation display of the first special symbol in the KT state Even when the corresponding background symbol or small symbol is not displayed, the variation state of the first special symbol or the second special symbol can be confirmed by the fourth symbol. In addition, since the fourth symbol has low visibility compared to the background symbol and the small symbol, in the normal state, it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the second special symbol for the variable display to the player, KT In the state, it is possible to reduce the degree of recognition of the variation display of the first special symbol for the player.

Further, a hold display lamp (not shown) corresponding to the first hold display or the second hold display may be provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9, and the hold display lamp may be lit and displayed regardless of the gaming state. . The display control of the hold display lamp may be controlled by the game control microcomputer 560, or may be controlled by the effect control microcomputer 200. In addition, the suspension display lamps whose display is controlled by each of the two may be separately provided. By separately providing the hold indication lamp in this manner, even if the second hold indication is not displayed in the normal state or the first hold indication is not displayed in the KT state, the first hold memory number or the second hold is indicated by the hold indication lamp. The number of memories can be confirmed. In addition, since the reserve display lamp is provided outside the frame of the effect display device 9 and has lower visibility than the reserve display on the first reserve display unit 61 and the second reserve display unit 62, the player can receive On the other hand, the recognition degree for the second hold display can be reduced, and in the KT state, the recognition degree for the first hold display can be reduced for the player.

Moreover, in the above-described modification, the first hold display or the second hold display is displayed according to the gaming state, and the first specific display or the second specific display is displayed according to the gaming state. It is assumed that the display positions of the display 61 and the second hold display 62 are the same (lower left of the display screen), and the display positions of the first specific display 61a and the second specific display 62a are the same (lower center of the display However, they may be at different positions. Similarly, in the above description, it is assumed that the display positions of the first background symbol display portion 91a and the second background symbol display portion 92a are the same (the center of the display screen), and the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion Although the display positions of 92b are the same (upper right portion of the display screen), they may be positions different from each other. Further, for example, the first background symbol display section 91a and the second background symbol display section 92a (or the first small symbol display section 91)
Even if the display position of b and the second small symbol display part 92b) is the same, it corresponds to the variable display of the first special symbol by making the display mode of the background symbol (or small symbol) displayed in different. It may be possible to distinguish whether it is or what corresponds to the variable display of the second special symbol. Further, for example, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are different (in particular, positions which do not overlap each other), it is possible to display the small symbols at the respective display positions. It becomes. In this case, in the normal state, the small symbol may be variably displayed on the second minor symbol display portion 92b in accordance with the variable display of the second special symbol. However, in this case,
It is preferable that the small symbols in the second small symbol display portion 92b have lower visibility than the small symbols in the first small symbol display portion 91b. Similarly, in the KT state such as during the chance time, the small symbol may be variably displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b in accordance with the variation display of the first special symbol. However, in this case, it is preferable that the small symbols in the first small symbol display portion 91b have lower visibility than the small symbols in the second small symbol display portion 92b.

[Display control example of second hold display etc. during chance time]
Next, an example of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display during the chance time displayed by the processing of the flowcharts of FIGS. 60 to 62 described above will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 64 (1) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times of completion of chance time is 10 or more in the chance time. Figure 64 (1
At this time, the second hold display is displayed in the second hold display unit 62 and the second specification display is displayed in the second specification display unit 62a, as shown in FIG. In addition, since the hold notice and the specific notice can be executed, the second hold display can be changed to a special mode, and
Specific indications can also be changed to special modes. During the chance time, the right display is performed to cause the player to hit the right.

Fig. 64 (2) shows that the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time is 9 to 6 during the chance time
An example of the display effect in the effect display apparatus 9 (liquid crystal display device) at the time of a time is shown. Figure 64 (2
At this time, the second hold display is displayed in the second hold display unit 62 and the second specification display is displayed in the second specification display unit 62a, as shown in FIG. However, since the execution of the holding notice and the specific notice is prohibited, the second holding display is displayed in the normal mode,
The second specific display is also displayed in the normal mode.

FIG. 64 (3) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the remaining number of times of the chance time end until the chance time is 5 or less during the chance time. Figure 64 (3)
At this time, a shielding effect (blackout effect) for shielding the display areas of the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display unit 62a with difficulty is performed as shown in FIG. Thereby, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 becomes difficult to visually recognize, and the second specification display unit 62
The second specific display in a becomes difficult to view. Note that this blackout effect gradually blacks out (the degree of transparency decreases) according to the decrease in the number of remaining times until the chance time ends.
Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display and the second specific display, and it can be impressively suggested that the number of remaining times until the chance time end has decreased.

By the way, as understood from the flowcharts of FIG. 60 to FIG. 62, when the remaining number of times until the chance time end is 5 or less, the additional display of the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be non-display. Therefore, even if the shielding effect (blackout effect) is not performed, the additional display of the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62 is made difficult to visually recognize (not displayed), and the second display in the second specification display unit 62a is performed. The specific display can be made difficult to see (not displayed). In addition, when the shielding effect (blackout effect) is executed, the additional display of the second hold display and the second specific display are not controlled to be hidden, and are controlled to be displayed as in FIG. 64 (2). It is also good. Even in this case, since the second hold display and the second specific display are blocked by the blackout effect displayed on the layer on the upper surface, the second hold display and the second hold display
As well as making the specific display difficult to view, the flow of display control of the second hold display and the second specific display can be made simpler.

Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (3), the second hold display is shifted to be displayed because the second hold display and the second specific display are limited to be displayed in a difficult-to-view state by the shield effect (second hold display The effect that the shift display is sequentially shifted to the right and the effect that the second hold display is shifted to the second specific display are similarly limited (it becomes difficult to visually recognize). In addition, even if the shielding effect is not executed, the second time already displayed when the remaining number of times until the chance time end is 5 times or less
When there is a hold display, all the second hold display may be controlled to be non-display, and the effect of the shift display of the second hold display may be limited to non-display.

Also, in the above, the second effect is the second effect by the shielding effect (blackout effect) that shields the entire screen.
Although it is difficult to visually recognize (or hide) by blocking the hold display or the second specific display, for example, the second hold display or the second display can be changed by changing the layout of the display screen.
The specific display may be difficult to see (or not displayed). Here, "change the layout of the display screen" is a concept including changing the display position and display size of various display items displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 9, and the display item is It is a concept including all displays displayed as effects on the effect display device 9, such as a background pattern and a hold display. As the change of the layout of the display screen, for example, the display area of the remaining number display 81 may be expanded. Specifically, by expanding the display area of the remaining number display 81 to the left, the second hold display unit 62 where the second hold display is displayed and the second specific display are displayed.
The display area of the specific display unit 62a may be shielded. Further, as the change of the layout of the display screen, for example, the second hold display and the second specific display may be shielded by expanding the second background symbol display part 92 a downward. Further, the shielding effect is not limited to the blackout effect, but may be an effect that shields the second hold display and the second specific display by using another display effect or a movable body (a movable performance object). . In addition, the second hold display and the second specific display may not be completely shielded, and may be difficult to view due to the decrease in the visibility. For example, in the effect display device 9, the display position of the second hold display and the second specific display is changed (for example, changed to the upper right corner) or the display size is changed (for example, reduced) It is also possible to reduce the sex.

In addition, the blackout effect described above is started on condition that the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 5 times or less, and the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be displayed so as not to be visible. However, the blackout effect is started on the condition that the remaining number of chances to end is 10 times or less, for example, and the transparency decreases as the remaining number decreases, and the remaining number is 10 times. In the case of six times, while the second hold display or the second specific display can be visually recognized, it may be difficult to visually recognize the second hold display or the second specific display when the number of remaining times reaches five. In this way, display control in which the second hold display or the second specific display is difficult to view can be made more comfortable. Moreover, the same effect can be applied also when using effects other than the blackout effect as the shielding effect.

FIG. 64 (4) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) when the fluctuation display of the final fluctuation of the chance time (100th rotation after the chance time is started) is finished. As shown in FIG. 64 (4), when the final variation of the chance time is over, a background symbol (for example, a stop symbol for showing an out (or a small hit)) of the variation display of the second special symbol (for example, “3”, “9” and “4” stop, and similarly, small symbols (eg, “3”, “9” and “4”) corresponding to the result of the variable display of the second special symbol stop. The background pattern and the small pattern may be different from each other. Then, with the end of the chance time, the right-handed display ends (is not displayed), and a left-handed notification for prompting the player to hit left is performed instead.
Although not shown, while the final change is fluctuating, an end indication (for example, a letter indication "CANCEL TIME END!") Is displayed to notify that the chance time is over, and Based on the value of the award ball number counter, the consecutive prize ball number display is displayed. As a result, the end of the continuous play and the number of all winning balls obtained during that time (total number of winning balls) are notified. At this time, the number of times of big hit (the number of consecutive units) in a series of periods from the first hit to the chance time ending may be notified together.

FIG. 64 (5) shows an example of the display effect in the effect display device 9 (liquid crystal display device) in the normal state immediately after the chance time ends (that is, the 101st rotation after the chance time is started). As shown in FIG. 64 (5), when the gaming state switches from the first KT state to the normal state, the second hold display on the second hold display unit 62 and the second specific display on the second specification display unit 62a are not displayed. Even if a second valid start winning command is generated (that is, even if a new valid second winning prize port 14 is activated), the second hold display and the second are controlled.
Specific indication is not displayed. On the other hand, when the first start winning command is newly generated by the player performing left hitting based on the left hitting notification shown in FIG. 64 (4) (that is, an effective winning to the new first starting winning entry occurs) And) the first specific display is displayed in the first specific display portion 61a, and the background pattern is variably displayed in the first background symbol display portion 91a according to the variable display of the first special symbol, and the first small symbol display The small symbols are variably displayed in the part 91b. As a result, the player recognizes the start of the variable display of the 101st rotation after the chance time is over.
In addition, when the first start winning command is newly generated during the variable display of the first special symbol, the first reserved storage number is updated, and thus the first reserved storage number display 71 is updated and displayed. The first hold display in the hold display unit 61 is additionally displayed.

Here, as described with reference to FIG. 64, the reason why the display control of the second hold display or the second specific display is different according to the remaining number of times until the chance time end will be described. As described with reference to FIG. 63, in this modification, the variation time of the second special symbol is very long (for example, 5 minutes or 15 minutes) in the normal state (non-KT state), and the normal state Since the left strike is recommended, the second hold display and the second specific display are controlled to be non-display to prevent the second special symbol from being recognized as being variable. For this reason, when control is performed in the normal state after the opportunity time ends, the second hold display or the second specific display is not displayed as described above with reference to FIG. Therefore, if the second hold display is displayed when the change display of the final change of the chance time (100 rotation after the start of the chance time) ends, the second hold display is switched to the normal state. Is suddenly controlled to be hidden, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable. Also, for example, if there is a second hold display changing to the special mode at the end of the final change of the chance time, the player may be discouraged by the non-display, or
Although there is a second hold display, in the normal state, the effect (such as a background pattern) is not displayed, which may cause an inconsistency in the effect. However, as described above, in this modification, the second hold display or the second specific display is performed before the final change of the chance time ends (that is, after the remaining number of times until the finish of the chance time is five). Since display control is performed to make it difficult to visually recognize, the degree of recognition of the player with respect to the second hold display or the second specific display is reduced, and the second hold display or the second specific display is not displayed when shifting to the normal gaming state. Even if it is controlled, it can be made not to give a sense of incongruity. In addition, when the remaining number of times of the chance time end eyebrows becomes 5 times or less, the display control of 2nd hold display and 2nd specific display is difficult to visually recognize, but the background pattern and small design corresponding to the fluctuation display of 2nd special symbol are visible Since display control is possible, it can be appropriately recognized that the variable display of the second special symbol is performed during the chance time.

By the way, in the above-mentioned modification, the display control of the second hold display or the second specific display is made to be difficult to visually recognize the condition that the number of remaining times of the chance time end is 5 or less. The condition of being less than 5 times is due to the following reasons. That is, in the above-mentioned modification, since the maximum number of stored second holding memories is four, a maximum of four second holding displays can be displayed, and the second specific display is also displayed during the fluctuation display of the second special symbol. Therefore, by displaying the second hold display and the second specific display, it is possible to make the player recognize information of up to five variations. Therefore, by controlling the display of the second hold display and the second specific display to be difficult to visually recognize when the remaining number of times until the end of the chance time reaches 5 times, it was visually recognized during the chance time after the end of the chance time It is possible to prevent the second specific display and the second hold display from being hidden. Note that the second hold display or the second specific display is performed on the condition that the remaining number of times is equal to or less than a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times) that is 5 or less, on the condition that the number of remaining times is 5 or less. The display may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize. In addition, the second hold display and the second specific display may be subjected to display control in which it is difficult to visually recognize until a predetermined number of fluctuation displays are performed after the chance time ends (after transition to the normal state), that is, the KT state The second hold display and the second specific display may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize over a period before and after the time including the end of the second period.

Moreover, in the above-mentioned modification, on the condition that the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 9 times or less, it limits (does not execute) the suspension notice of the second suspension display and the identification notice of the second specific display. However, the reason for the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 or less is as follows. That is, as described above, when the number of remaining times is five or less, display control of the second hold display or the second specific display is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the second hold display or the second display controlled to be difficult to see
If the mode of the specific display is changed to the special mode, it may be difficult to visually recognize the display while giving the player a sense of expectation, which may impair the player's sense of expectation, or Inconsistencies may occur. For this reason, the fourth second pending display, which is the maximum pending number, is shifted as the second specific display after four changes by limiting the pending notification of the second pending display on condition that the remaining number of times is 9 or less. At this time, even if the remaining number of times is 5 or less, the second specific display in the normal mode is only controlled to be difficult to visually recognize even if the visual difficulty is controlled to be difficult. It becomes possible to avoid. It should be noted that it is necessary to limit the hold notification of the second hold display on the condition that the remaining number of times is 9 times or less in consideration of the possibility that the second hold display may be shifted up to 4 variations. However, such a situation does not apply to the second specific display. For this reason, with regard to the second specific display, the specific advance notice may be limited on the condition that the remaining number of times the display becomes difficult to view becomes five or less. In addition, the number of remaining times is a predetermined number of times greater than 9 (for example, 20), provided that the number of remaining times is 9 or less.
Times) it is also possible to limit the suspension notice of the second suspension display and the identification notice of the second identification display on condition that the following conditions are met.

By the way, in a special state controllable gaming machine capable of generating a small hit per unit time, such as the KT state, the player remains when the KT state ends and the normal state is entered. In order to confirm the success or failure result of whether or not to hit a jackpot based on the second pending storage,
After the end of the KT state, there are cases where the game machine is intentionally occupied without firing the game ball. In such a case, it is not appropriate because the operation of the gaming machine is reduced in the game arcade. In addition, if the player can recognize the second hold display relating to the second hold memory remaining after the KT state ends, the player may not display the entire display for a long time (for example, if there are four 15-minute long fluctuation hold, The KT state is ended in an unnatural display state in which the second hold display is displayed for 60 minutes. Furthermore, even though the player does not necessarily make a big hit based on the remaining second pending storage, until the variable display based on the second pending storage is ended and the result of yes / no is displayed Since it takes a certain amount of time (for example, 15 minutes), the player loses the opportunity to end the game, and if the player continues the game, the player may be disadvantaged. However, as described above, according to this modification, after the KT state ends, the second hold display or the second specific display is not displayed, and the second hold display during the chance time (from before the end 5 fluctuation) By controlling the second specific display to be difficult to visually recognize, it is possible to prevent the player from excessively recognizing that there is the remaining second holding memory. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player's intentional occupation of the gaming machine, thereby making it possible to prevent the decrease in the operation of the gaming machine, and to realize display without discomfort at the end of the KT state. It is possible to prevent the player from losing the opportunity to end the game.

In the above modification, the second hold display or the second specific display is displayed in the KT state, but the second hold display or the second specific display is not always displayed regardless of the gaming state (or It may be difficult to see). This is suitable, for example, in the case of a gaming machine having a predetermined ratio per KT and per non-KT as follows. Here, per KT is a big hit that can be determined when executing the second special symbol variable display, and means a big hit controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the end of the big hit game. In addition, the non-KT is a big hit that can be determined when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, and means a big hit that is controlled in the normal game state immediately after the big hit ends. Such per KT and non-KT
In a gaming machine having a hit, in the KT state after winning per KT, it is conceivable to display a second hold display to improve the interest of the game. And if you win a non-KT per such gaming state, when the second special symbol showing a non-KT is stopped (that is, when a big hit is determined) has been right-handed in the KT state Up to 4 by
It is likely that two second pending displays are displayed. However, when winning per non-KT, by being controlled to the normal state after the big hit game, the second pending display that was displayed before the big hit is determined will be controlled to non-display. Then, the player is discouraged by the non-display of the second hold display changing to the special mode, for example, before the jackpot is determined, or in the normal state even though there is the second hold display, the effect (( If the background pattern etc. is not displayed, there is a possibility that the rendering will be inconsistent. Therefore, in order to avoid such an inconsistency in the effect, it is difficult to visually recognize the second hold display related to the second hold storage stored later than the second hold storage indicating non-KT per unit in the KT state. Preferably, display control (for example, non-display) is performed. Therefore, for example, pre-reading at the time of start winning (the second winning judgment result command)
On the basis of the above, it may be considered that the second hold display relating to the subsequent start winning (second pending storage) is visually difficult to visually indicate at the timing at which the starting winning combination indicating non-KT hit has occurred. However, when display control based on such pre-reading is performed, since it is decided and suggested that it is a big hit in advance, there is a possibility that the interest of the game may be reduced. Therefore, in the gaming machine having such non-KT per unit, the second hold display may not always be displayed (or it is difficult to visually recognize) even in the KT state (regardless of the gaming state). By doing this, K
In the T state, without suggesting a big hit in advance, it is also possible to avoid the inconsistency of the effect when transitioning to the normal gaming state by the fact that the second hold display is not displayed even if won per non-KT .

In the gaming machine having the non-KT per-charge, for example, based on the pre-reading at the time of the start-up winning, at the timing when the start-up winning showing the non-KT per occurs, the second regarding the subsequent start winning (second reserve memory) In addition to display control of the suspension display to be difficult to visually recognize, based on the pre-reading at the time of the starting winning combination, at the timing when the starting winning combination showing a gap (or small hit) at a predetermined ratio occurs, the subsequent starting winning combination (second The second hold display related to the hold storage) may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize for a predetermined period (predetermined number of changes). In this case, the second hold display may be controlled so as to be difficult to visually recognize for a predetermined period even when the jackpot is not a big hit (there is a so-called gusset). Inconsistencies in the effects when transitioning to the normal gaming state can be avoided because the second hold display is not displayed even if the player wins per KT.

In addition, as described above, in the gaming machine having per-KT and per-non-KT, based on display control to make it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display regardless of the gaming state, based on pre-reading, per non-KT Inconsistencies in effects can be avoided by performing display control that makes it difficult to visually recognize the second hold display for a predetermined period when there is a gap (or small hit) at a predetermined ratio. And, these display control (hereinafter referred to as specific display control) is not limited to the gaming machine having KT and non-KT.
The present invention can also be applied to a gaming machine having a predetermined percentage of jackpots per KT and per non-KT (hereinafter referred to as quasi-non-KT). Here, per semi non-KT is a big hit that can be determined when performing the variable display of the second special symbol, from the predetermined number of times after the big hit end (for example, the maximum number of the second pending storage four times) It means that the big hit that shifts to the normal gaming state after being controlled to the KT state for a small number of times (for example, once). In a gaming machine having such a non-per-KT match at a predetermined rate, the number of times the KT state is controlled after the big hit game when the per-non-KT is won when controlled in the KT state is the second reserved memory number Less than the maximum number of For this reason, if the second hold display is displayed while being controlled in the KT state, the KT state after each semi non-KT ends and is controlled to the normal gaming state, and the second hold display is not displayed. Becomes a part of up to four second pending display that may have been displayed when the second special symbol indicating per semi non-KT stopped (that is, when a big hit was confirmed) (The second hold display related to the hold storage) may not be displayed. For this reason, even in a gaming machine having (or in addition to) a non-KT per quasi-non-KT at a predetermined ratio, it is possible to avoid the inconsistency of the effects and the like by performing the above-mentioned specific display control.

In the above, per KT is a big hit controlled in the KT state until the next big hit after the big hit game end, but after the big hit the predetermined number of times (for example, 4 times which is the maximum number of the second pending storage) It may be a big hit controlled to the KT state more times (for example, 100 times). Even in this case, since there is a possibility of winning per non-KT or semi-non-KT in the KT state, the above-mentioned specific display control can be similarly applied.

In addition, although the above-described modification is applied to a gaming machine (so-called loop machine) controlled at a high probability state until the next big hit at a predetermined ratio (65%), A game machine controlled with high probability until the fluctuation display of the specified number of times is over after the big hit game
It may be applied to a so-called ST machine). Also, in this case, the variation time of the second special symbol is set to be shorter than that in the normal state when being controlled in the KT state as being controlled simultaneously in the KT state when controlled in the high probability state The frequency of occurrence of small hits per unit time may be increased by In this case as well, the second hold display or the second specific display is controlled to be difficult to visually recognize from the 5th fluctuation of the final fluctuation controlled in the high probability state, and the final fluctuation is 9
It is preferable to limit the suspension notice of the second suspension display and the identification notice of the second specific display from before the change.

In addition, when it is controlled in high probability state, drawing of whether it moves to low probability state every fluctuation, (
A game machine (a so-called fall lottery type game machine) which performs a fall lottery, or a game machine controlled in a high probability state (a so-called S) in a predetermined period of time (ST period) until a predetermined number of variable display ends.
In the T-type gaming machine, the control may be performed in the second KT state when controlled in the high probability state, and may be controlled in the non-KT state when controlled in the low probability state.
In such a gaming machine, from the high probability state / second KT state to the low probability state / non-KT state (
When transitioning to the normal state, the final fluctuation (secondary KT state) controlled in the KT state (second KT state)
That is, in the fall lottery type, the second hold display is controlled to be difficult to visually recognize in the fluctuation winning the fall lottery, and in the ST type, the final fluctuation of the ST period), and the second specific display is controlled to be visually difficult to visually recognize. Good.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described above, even if winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 is detected in the normal state (non-KT state), the second hold display or the second specific display It is not displayed, and a background symbol or a small symbol corresponding to the variable display of the second special symbol is not displayed (that is, the display effect is limited). However, in the normal state, when the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening 14 is detected, not only limiting the display effect, but also the second starting winning opening 14
It is good also as what performs notification production (for example, left hit notification) which does not perform right hitting aiming at winning a prize. By doing this, the player's recognition degree is lowered by the fact that the second special symbol is variably displayed for the game ball winning event to the second starting winning opening 14 in the normal state. It is possible to relatively increase the degree of recognition of the player that it is an opportunity for the left hit notification to be performed (the right hit is prohibited). For this reason, it is possible to reduce the right strike aiming at an illegal small hit.

Further, in the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are different (in particular, positions not overlapping each other), in the case of forced removal, in the normal state Even if it exists, the small symbol may be stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 62b, and the small symbol may be stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b even in the KT state.
For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variably displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b according to the variation display of the first special symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol is a big hit variation at the same time When the fluctuation display of the second special symbol that has been variably displayed is forced off, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, the small symbol indicating the forced detachment is stopped in the second small symbol display portion 92b It may be displayed. Similarly, in the KT state, the small symbol is variably displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b according to the variation display of the second special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol is a big hit variation, At the same time, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol that is being displayed in a fluctuating manner is forced to be distracted, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, a small symbol that indicates a forced disengaging in the first small symbol display portion 91b It may be stopped and displayed.

In the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are different from each other (in particular, positions which do not overlap each other), the big hit is in the normal state. However, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b. For example, in the normal state, the small symbol is variably displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b according to the variable display of the first special symbol, but the variation display of the second special symbol that is simultaneously variably displayed is a big hit variation In some cases, when the second special symbol is stopped and displayed, a small symbol indicating a big hit may be stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b. Also, when the variable display of the first special symbol is started while the variable display of the second special symbol showing the big hit is performed, the small symbol showing the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b. After that, the first normal instruction notification 56A may be performed, or the second normal instruction notification 56B may be performed to positively notify that it is a big hit. Also, at this time,
Even if the variation of the special symbol is started, the effect on the variation of the first special symbol is limited (
For example, the variation display of the background symbol and the small symbol according to the variation of the first special symbol is not executed), but instead the effect according to the variation display of the second special symbol (special effect showing a big hit) is performed It may be On the other hand, when the variation display (big hit variation) of the second special symbol is finished without the variation display of the first special symbol being performed, after the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b, The first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed, or the second reduction instruction notification 5C.
It may be notified that it is a big hit negatively by performing 6D. Note that
If the variation display of the second special symbol in the normal state is a variation (or small hit) variation, as described above, the small symbol is not displayed in the second small symbol display 92b (that is, off or small hit) In the case of (1), notification may not be given depending on the display effect).

In the above-described modification, when the display positions of the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion 92b are different (in particular, positions not overlapping with each other), they are in the KT state at the big hit. However, the small symbols may be stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display portion 61b. For example, in the KT state, the small symbol is variably displayed in the second small symbol display portion 92b according to the variation display of the second special symbol, but the variation display of the first special symbol being variably displayed at the same time is a big hit variation In some cases, when the first special symbol is stopped and displayed, a small symbol indicating a big hit may be stopped and displayed on the first small symbol display portion 91b. Note that K
In the T state, it is always the player's right-handed, so when the first special symbol showing the big hit is being displayed, the second special symbol's changing display is almost always started. is there. And in such a case, after the small symbol showing the big hit is stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b, the first normal instruction notification 56A is performed, or the second normal instruction notification 5
It may be notified that it is a big hit positively by performing 6B. Also,
At this time, even if the variation of the second special symbol is started, the effects relating to the variation of the second special symbol are limited (for example, the variation display of the background symbol and the small symbol according to the variation of the second special symbol is executed Instead, effects corresponding to the variable display of the first special symbol (special effects indicating a big hit) may be performed. On the other hand, although it is rare, for example, when the game ball is made to win by mistake in the first starting winning opening 13 when being controlled to the KT state, the second special symbol is variably displayed as when it is left. When the variable display (big hit fluctuation) of the first special symbol is finished, the small symbol indicating the big hit is stopped and displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b, and then the first reduction instruction notification 56C is performed, or the second It is good also as what is notified that it is a big hit passively by performing reduction instruction report 56D. Alternatively, in the KT state, since it is always the player to hit the right, the first normal instruction notification 56A is issued, for example, when the game ball passes the actuation gate 17 by the right strike, or [2] The fact that a big hit has been positively notified may be made by the fact that the normal instruction notification 56B is performed. In the KT state, when the fluctuation display of the first special symbol is out of movement, the small symbol is not displayed in the first small symbol display portion 91b as described above (that is, display in the case of disconnection) Depending on the effect, it may not be notified.

Further, in the above-described modification, in the suspension notice determination process of step S7079, although the difference between the KT states (the first KT state or the second KT state) is not mentioned, whether it is the first KT state or the second KT state In response to this, the on-hold notice determination process may be executed. Specifically, in the suspension notice determination process, the display mode of the second suspension display is more likely to be changed to the special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, even if the suspension notice is easily performed). Good. This is due to the following reasons. That is, in the first KT state among the KT states, there are very few cases where the game ball will win the special variable winning ball device 22 although small hits are likely to occur (that is, it is difficult to obtain a winning ball due to the small hits). On the other hand, the second K in the KT state
In the T state, a small hit is likely to occur, and the game ball is likely to win a prize on the special variable winning ball device 22 (that is, it is easy to give a player a profit by a small hit). . Therefore, in the second KT state, the player expects a small hit (that is, a break), but does not expect to win a big hit that the second KT state may end (not rather a big hit for a long time) expect). On the other hand, in the first KT state, since it is difficult for the player to obtain a winning ball even if a small hit occurs, he expects a big hit instead of a small hit. For this reason, in the first KT state, it is easier to carry out the hold notification than in the second KT state.
In the first KT state, the expectation of the player expecting the big hit can be enhanced, and in the second KT state, the expectation of the player expecting the small hit can be prevented. For the same reason, in the specific advance notice determination process of step S9307, the display mode of the second specific display is more easily changed to the special mode in the first KT state than in the second KT state (that is, the specific advance notice is given). easy)
It is good also as things. In addition, as a display result of the variable display of the second special symbol, if you have a non-small hit other than the big hit (normal drop) at a predetermined rate, the second pending display or the second
It is also possible to give a holding advance notice or a specific notice that changes to a mode (for example, a letter indication "small") in which the specific indication is expected to be a small hit.

Further, in the above-described modification, as described with reference to FIG. 60, the effect control microcomputer 200 grasps the remaining number of times of the chance time end until the number of remaining times of the chance time end becomes 9 or less. And limit the execution of pending announcements. However, it may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560 whether or not to limit the hold notification. Specifically, the microcomputer 560 for game control grasps the remaining number of chance time ending habits by counting the number of changes after controlling to the low probability / the first KT state after the big hit game, and the chance time ending If the number of remaining bags is less than 9 times, a command for prohibiting a suspension notice may be transmitted as a second prize determination result command to be sent when the second valid start winning occurs. In this way, the effect control microcomputer 200, which receives the second prize determination result command, does not know the remaining number of times of the chance time end until the second prize determination result command based on the second prize determination result command. It can be determined whether to execute or prohibit. Further, the effect control microcomputer 200 can execute the hold notification only when receiving a predetermined hold notification command from the game control microcomputer 560, and the game control microcomputer 560 can When the remaining number of times until the chance time end becomes 9 or less, even if the second valid start winning is generated, it may be configured not to send the reservation notice command. Even in this case, the effect control microcomputer 200 can determine whether to execute or prohibit the on-hold notice based on the on-hold notice command without grasping the remaining number of times until the chance time ends. In the same manner, whether to limit the specific advance notice is the effect control microcomputer 200.
Instead, it may be determined by the game control microcomputer 560.

As described above, according to this modification, the identification information is variably displayed, and the gaming machine can be controlled to an advantageous state (in the present example, a big hit state) advantageous to the player, and the first identification Variable display execution means (in this example, game control) capable of executing variable display of information (in this example, first special symbol) and variable display of second identification information (in this example, second special symbol) in parallel Predetermined state control means (this example which can be controlled to a predetermined state (in this example, a small hit gaming state in this example) which is advantageous for the player and which is different from the advantageous state in the microcomputer 560 for executing steps S26A and S26B) In the game control microcomputer 560, the part that executes steps S358 to S360), the normal state (in this example, the non-KT state), and the second identification information than the normal state. Control can be made to a special state (in this example, the KT state) in which the frequency of control to a predetermined state is high by selecting a short variation time at a high rate as the display execution time (in this example, see FIG. 13) Certain state control means (in this example, steps S2208A, S2211A, S2209B, S22 in the microcomputer 560 for game control
10B, S2213B, and S2214B), a first holding storage unit (in this example, a first holding storage buffer) capable of storing information relating to variable display of the first identification information as a first holding storage; A second storage of information relating to variable display of identification information as a second pending storage
Hold storage means (in the present example, the second hold storage buffer), first hold display corresponding to the first hold storage (in the present example, the first hold display in the first hold display unit 61), and the second hold storage Hold display means (in this example, step S7 in the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of displaying a second hold display (in this example, the second hold display in the second hold display unit 62) corresponding to
07) and the hold display means displays the second hold display in a specific period including the timing when the special state ends (in this example, the period when the chance time It is possible to make it difficult to visually check (in this example, refer to FIG. 64).
Thereby, in the gaming machine which can be controlled in the special state, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. More specifically, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display. The specific period may be a period including the timing at which the special state (in this example, the KT state) ends, and is not limited to the period before the end of the special state until the end (for example, 5 variations before the end), It may include a predetermined period (for example, 5 variations after the end) after the special state ends (after the transition to the normal state).

Further, according to this modification, when the variable display of the second identification information (in the present example, the second special symbol) is performed, the specific display corresponding to the second identification information (in the present example, the second identification display) It further comprises a specific display means capable of displaying the second specific display in the unit 62a (in this example, a portion for executing steps S9308 and S9310 in the effect control microcomputer 200), and the specific period In the period other than the end period / the remaining 5 fluctuation period or less), the hold display means can display the second hold display and the specific display means can display the specific display, and in the specific period, the hold display means 2) It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize the hold display (in the present example, step S7082 is not executed if Y in step S7081), and the specific display means And difficult view the display (in this example, step S9309
It is possible to do step S9310) in the case of Y). As a result, when the special state ends, appropriate display control can be realized also for the specific display corresponding to the second identification information.

Further, according to this modification, the predetermining means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 executes steps S65A and S65B) determines whether to control to the advantageous state based on the establishment of the start condition. Part) and a specific determination means (in this example, the game control microcomputer 560 determines steps S312, S215, and S216) to determine whether or not to be in an advantageous state based on the second hold storage before the determination of the predetermination means. , S322))
And the pending display means changes the second pending display corresponding to the second pending storage determined by the specific determining means to the first special mode according to the determination result of the specific determining means. 1 mode change presentation (in this example, suspension notice) can be executed, and the specific display means corresponds to the second identification information which has been determined by the prior determination means according to the determination result of the prior determination means It is possible to execute a second mode change effect (in this example, a specific advance notice) for changing the specific display to the second special mode, and a predetermined period including a specific period (in this example, the chance time end to the remaining 9 fluctuation or less Period), the suspension display means limits the execution of the first mode change effect (in the present example, step S7).
In the case of Y at 078, step S7079 is not executed) and the specific display unit is the second
The execution of the aspect change presentation is restricted (in the present example, step S9307 is not executed when Y is in step S9306). In this way, it is possible to avoid the inconsistency of the effects in the specific period in which the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage and the specific display corresponding to the second identification information are difficult to view.

Further, according to this modification, the state control means is set as the special state in the first special state (in this example, the first KT state) and the second special state (in the present example) having a higher degree of advantage than the first special state. Then,
And the second KT state). This makes it possible to eliminate the monotony of the gameplay in the special state, and to improve the interest of the game when controlling to the special state.

Moreover, according to this modification, in response to the variable display of the identification information, the effect pattern (in this example,
Variable display of the first background symbol display portion 91a and the background symbol in the second background symbol display portion 92a and a reduced symbol smaller than the effect symbol (in this example, the first small symbol display portion 91b and the second small symbol display portion S920D, S920E, S920H, S92 in the effect control means (in this example, the effect control microcomputer 200) capable of performing variable display of the small symbol in 92b.
0I and S920K), and the effect control means is in a normal state (in this example, non-K).
In state T), variable display of the effect symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the first background symbol display section 91a) corresponding to the variable display of the first identification information is performed, and the variable display of the second identification information is performed. The variable display of the rendering symbol (in this example, the background symbol in the second background symbol display section 92a) is not performed (in this example, in the case of Y at step S920C, step S920E is performed,
In step S920G, N is executed to execute step S920J), and in the special state (in this example, the KT state), the variable display of the effect design corresponding to the variable display of the second identification information is performed, and the first identification information (In this example, step S920I is performed if Y in step S920G, and step S920F is performed if N in step S920C). A reduced symbol corresponding to variable display of either the first identification information or the second identification information depending on which of the state and the special state is controlled (in this example, the first small symbol display portion 91 b or the second Variable display of the small symbol in the small symbol display portion 92b is executed (in this example, depending on whether it is the non-KT state or the KT state, steps S920D and S920H Either to run), it was decided. This makes it possible to realize appropriate display control corresponding to the state of the reduced symbol, and to reduce the degree of recognition of the variable identification display of the second identification information to the player in the normal state.

Moreover, according to this modification, the hold display means can display the first hold display but can not display the second hold display in the normal state (in the present example, the non-KT state). Then, step S 7075 is executed when Y in step S 7073, and step S 7080 or S 708 2 is not executed when N in step S 7077). As a result, in the normal state, the player's visibility with respect to the second hold display corresponding to the second hold storage can be reduced, and appropriate display control can be realized for the second hold display.

Further, according to this modification, the pending display means displays the first pending storage number display corresponding to the number of first pending storages (in this example, regardless of whether the normal state or the special state is controlled). The first hold storage number display 71) is displayed, and the second hold count display corresponding to the second hold storage count is not displayed (in this example, in the case of Y at step S7071, step S7072 is executed, step S7076 The processing corresponding to step S 7072 is not executed even if Y). This makes it possible to reduce the player's visibility for the number of second holding memories while securing the player's recognizability for the number of first holding memories, and each of the first holding memory and the second holding memory Display control appropriate for the number of pending storages of can be realized.

Further, according to this modification, a predetermined path (in the present example, to the right of the game area 7) of the flow-down paths in which the game medium (in this example, game balls) flow down, the game medium can pass Specific area (
In this example, the operation gate 17) and predetermined conditions (in this example, the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed)
After the game is established, the advantageous state (in this example,
Step S305 to S3 in the case of Y at step S2501 in the microcomputer 560 for game control in this embodiment, which can be controlled to the jackpot gaming state)
07, and a portion for executing S355 to S357) and a predetermined promotion notification (in this example, a first instruction notification) for promoting the discharge of the game medium to the predetermined route based on the establishment of the predetermined condition. A promotion notification that can execute a specific promotion notification (in this example, a second instruction notification) that promotes the release of gaming media to a specific area after a predetermined period (10 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the execution of the predetermined promotion notification. Means (in this example, step S4404 in the effect control microcomputer 200
, S4405, S4604, and S4605) are further provided. As a result, it is possible to appropriately notify the trigger for controlling to the advantageous state while suppressing the complexity of the effect.

Moreover, in this embodiment or modification, the low probability / first KT state is a predetermined number of times (in this example, 1
Although the case where it was constituted to end based on having performed the change display of 00) was shown, it is not restricted to such a mode. For example, the second KT state (in this example, high probability / second KT
The state) may also be configured to end based on execution of the variable display a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times). Further, for example, the first KT state may be shifted to the second KT state based on the execution of the predetermined number of fluctuation displays, or the second KT may be performed based on the predetermined number of the fluctuation displays. It may be configured to shift from the state to the first KT state.

Further, although in the embodiment and the modification, a plurality of big hit types are provided only for the big hit, a plurality of small hit types may be provided for the small hit. In this case, for example, the opening time of the special variable winning prize ball device 22 or the like is different according to the small hitting type, or the variable winning ball device to be opened is different according to the small hitting type Thus, the degree of advantage may be different depending on the type of small hit. When the variable winning ball apparatus to be opened is configured to be different, for example, the special variable winning ball apparatus 20 may be opened or the special variable winning ball apparatus 22 may be opened depending on the small hit type. Alternatively, a plurality of small hit special variable winning ball devices may be provided, and which special variable winning ball device may be opened may be different depending on the small hit type.

Also, in this embodiment or modification, the state transitions to the second KT state (high probability / second KT state) mainly in the case of 16R probability variation big hit, and in the case of 6R probability variation big hit or 2R probability variation big hit
Although the case of transition to the first KT state and transition to the low probability / first KT state in the case of the 6R normal big hit or the 2R normal big hit has been shown, the present invention is not limited to such an embodiment. For example, even if it is the same jackpot type, it may be configured to have both the case of transition to the first KT state and the case of transition to the second KT state. In this case, for example, even if the same 6R probability variation big hit or 6R normal big hit, it may be configured such that there are both cases of transition to the first KT state and transition to the second KT state.

In this embodiment or modification, the KT state is internally controlled, but when the first KT state is controlled, a small hit is likely to occur. Rarely, the special winning opening 24 does not have a winning, and when viewed from the player, it looks substantially the same as being controlled to a so-called high base state. Therefore, it is possible to realize the same playability as a gaming machine controlled to a so-called high base state, to prevent the player from feeling discomfort, and to realize plural types of KT states having different degrees of advantage , The game interest can be improved.

Further, in the above-described embodiment and modifications, “the ratio is different” means A: B = 70%:
Not only those with different proportions such as 30% or A: B = 30%: 70%, A:
It is a concept that also includes different proportions in a relationship such as B = 100%: 0% (ie, one with 100% allocation and the other with 0% allocation).

Further, in the above embodiment and modifications, for example, a case is shown in which a plurality of types of special symbols of "1" to "9", background symbols (effect symbols), and normal symbols are variably displayed and display results are derived and displayed. But,
Variable display is not limited to such an aspect. For example, the symbol to be variably displayed and the symbol to be derived and displayed do not necessarily have to be the same, and a symbol different from the symbol displayed to be variably displayed may be derived and displayed. Moreover, it is not necessary to variably display a plurality of types of symbols, and variable display may be performed using only one type of symbol. In this case, for example, the variable display may be performed by alternately repeating lighting and blinking of the one type of symbol display. And even in this case, one kind of symbol used for the variable display may be derived and displayed at the end, or a symbol different from the one kind of symbol is finally derived and displayed It may be one.

Further, in the above embodiment and modification, the effect control substrate 80, the sound output substrate 70 and the lamp driver substrate 35 are provided as the substrate on which the circuit for controlling the effect device is mounted. However, the effect device is controlled May be mounted on one substrate. Furthermore, the effect display device 9
A first effect control board (display control board) on which a circuit for controlling the image is mounted, and a second effect control board on which a circuit for controlling the other effect devices (lamp, LED, speaker 27 etc.) is mounted And two substrates may be provided.

Further, in the above embodiment and modification, the game control microcomputer 560 directly transmits the command to the effect control microcomputer 200, but the game control microcomputer 560 may use another board (for example, A sound / lamp board provided with functions by the circuit mounted on the audio output board 70 such as the audio output board 70 or the lamp driver board 35 shown in FIG. 4 or by the circuits mounted on the lamp driver board 35 ) May be transmitted to the microcomputer 200 for effect control in the effect control substrate 80 via another substrate. In that case, the command may simply pass through on another board, and the audio output board 70, the lamp driver board 35
, A control unit such as a microcomputer is mounted on the sound / lamp substrate, the control unit executes control relating to voice control and lamp control in response to receiving a command, and further, the received command is as it is or for example The command may be changed to a simplified command and transmitted to the effect control microcomputer 200 that controls the effect display device 9. Even in that case, the sound control board 200 and the lamp driver are similar to the case where the effect control microcomputer 200 performs the display control according to the effect control command directly received from the game control microcomputer 560 in the above embodiment. Display control can be performed according to a command received from the substrate 35 or the sound / lamp substrate.

In the above embodiment and modifications, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game machine, but according to the present invention, a predetermined bet number is set by inserting a medal, and the player operates the operation lever according to the operation of the control lever. A slot machine in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out to a player when a combination of stop symbols becomes a combination of specific symbols when a plurality of types of symbols are rotated and the symbols are stopped in response to the player's operation of the stop button. It is also possible to apply to

In the above embodiment and modifications, although the game machine is used as an example of the game machine, the game machine according to the present invention is not limited to a game machine which pays out a game medium as a prize. The present invention can also be applied to an enclosed type game machine which seals game media such as game balls and gives a score when a prize giving condition is established.

Further, in the above embodiment and modifications, there is a probability variation big hit or normal big hit as a big hit type, and a gaming machine controlled to a definite variation state after a big hit game is ended based on having been decided as a big hit type as a big hit type. Although shown, it is not limited to such a gaming machine. For example, a special variable winning prize ball device having a predetermined probability variation area provided therein (a probability variation area may be provided in a special variable prize winning ball device provided with only one, or a plurality of special variable winning prize balls provided The probability change area may be provided in a part of the device, and the probability change is determined based on the fact that the game ball has passed the probability change area in the special variable winning prize ball device during the big hit game, the big hit game The configuration described in the above embodiment can also be applied to a gaming machine that is controlled to be in a positive change state after the end.

  The present invention is applicable to gaming machines such as pachinko gaming machines and slot machines.

1 Pachinko gaming machine 8a 1st special symbol display 8b 2nd special symbol display 9 effect display device 9a 1st variable display 9b 2nd variable display 9c background symbol display 13 13 1st start winning opening 13a 1st starting opening Switch 14 2nd start winning opening 14a 2nd starting opening switch 15 variable winning ball device 17 operation gate 17a operation gate switch 18c symbol holding memory display portion 20 special variable winning ball device 22 special variable winning ball device 23 bottom member 24 special winning hole 23a 1st count switch 25a 2nd count switch 31 main board 32 gate 56 CPU
80 effect control board 200 effect control microcomputer 201 effect control CPU
560 Microcomputer for game control

Claims (1)

A gaming machine capable of variably displaying identification information and controlling it to an advantageous state advantageous to a player,
Variable display execution means capable of concurrently executing variable display of the first identification information and variable display of the second identification information;
Predetermined state control means which is advantageous for the player and can be controlled to a predetermined state different from the advantageous state;
Control can be made between a normal state and a special state in which the frequency of control to the predetermined state is high by selecting a short variation time at a high rate as an execution time of the variable display of the second identification information than the normal state. Certain state control means,
A first hold storage unit capable of storing information relating to variable display of the first identification information as a first hold storage;
A second hold storage unit capable of storing information related to variable display of the second identification information as a second hold storage;
And a holding display unit capable of displaying a first holding display corresponding to the first holding storage and a second holding display corresponding to the second holding storage,
The hold display unit can make the second hold display difficult to view in a specific period including the timing when the special state ends.
A game machine characterized by